the theories of hans hofmann and their influence on …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the...

151
THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON HIS WEST-COAST CANADIAN STUDENTS by ROGER LEE B.A., University of British Columbia, 1964 A THESIS SUBMITTED IN PARTIAL FULFILMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF ARTS in the Department of Fine Arts We accept this thesis as conforming to the required standard THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA April, 1966

Upload: others

Post on 12-Jun-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON HIS WEST-COAST CANADIAN STUDENTS

by

ROGER LEE B.A., U n i v e r s i t y of B r i t i s h Columbia, 1964

A THESIS SUBMITTED IN PARTIAL FULFILMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF

MASTER OF ARTS

i n the Department of

Fine A r t s

We accept t h i s t h e s i s as conforming t o the re q u i r e d standard

THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA

A p r i l , 1966

Page 2: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

In p resen t i ng t h i s t h e s i s in p a r t i a l f u l f i l m e n t o f

the requirements fo r an advanced degree at the U n i v e r s i t y o f

B r i t i s h Columbia, I agree that the L i b r a r y s h a l l make i t f r e e l y

a v a i l a b l e f o r re fe rence and s tudy . I f u r t h e r agree that pe r ­

m iss ion f o r ex tens i ve copying o f t h i s t h e s i s f o r s c h o l a r l y

purposes may be granted by the Head of my Department o r by

h i s r e p r e s e n t a t i v e s . It i s understood that copy ing o r p u b l i ­

c a t i o n o f t h i s t h e s i s f o r f i n a n c i a l ga in s h a l l not be a l lowed

wi thout my w r i t t e n p e r m i s s i o n .

Department o f ^IXSL r \ V \<,

The U n i v e r s i t y o f B r i t i s h Columbia Vancouver 8, Canada

Date f \ ^ i l * 3 j -13 6 6

Page 3: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER PAGE

I . HANS HOFMANN, A SHORT BIOGRAPHICAL STUDY . 1

I I . THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN 8

I I I . THE WEST-COAST CANADIAN STUDENTS OF THE

HANS HOFMANN SCHOOL OF ART 91

ILLUSTRATIONS 127

BIBLIOGRAPHY 131

Page 4: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

ABSTRACT

The t o p i c of my t h e s i s i s an a n a l y s i s of Hans Hofmann's t h e o r e t i c a l w r i t i n g s on a r t and t h e i r p o s s i b l e i n f l u e n c e on h i s West-Coast Canadian students. I have inc l u d e d a short biography of Hofmann i n order that the reader may become aware of the events t h a t l e d up t o h i s t h e o r e t i c a l development.

Through a l l a v a i l a b l e published m a t e r i a l on and by Hans Hofmann, I have endeavoured t o analyze and t o e x p l a i n h i s t h e o r i e s which are often quoted but seldom understood. Hofmann"s a r t was i n s p i r e d by nature. This i n s p i r a t i o n enabled him t o create on the canvas the p e r c e i v a b l e movements of "push and p u l l " and

"expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n . " These movements are caused by form and c o l o r on a bare canvas which creates the combined e f f e c t of two and three d i m e n s i o n a l i t y . How­ever, the two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y of the p i c t u r e plane i s r e t a i n e d momentarily because v i s u a l l y i t appears two dimensional but past experience of the observer creates the e f f e c t of three d i m e n s i o n a l i t y . These movements of "push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n , " which are perpendicular t o each other, are created by the simultaneous development of form and c o l o r . I f these movements are able t o re£lect the a r t i s t ' s mind,

Page 5: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

i i i

s e n s i b i l i t y , temperament and past experience, a symphonic p a i n t i n g , a category of the f i n e a r t s , or a work of a r t w i l l have been created. The s p i r i t which has been captured, emits the a r t i s t ' s l i f e f o r the p h y s i c a l d u r a t i o n of the p a i n t i n g .

Although t h e s e i t h e o r i e s were taught by Hofmann at h i s schoo l s , he d i d not expect h i s students t o accept them w i t h ­out a second thought. He wanted h i s students t o develop from them as he had developed from o t h e r s .

The e f f e c t of Hofmann Ts teachings on the contemporary t h e o r i e s of i n d i v i d u a l students was asc e r t a i n e d by means of a s e r i e s of i n t e r v i e w s w i t h Hofmann's West-Coast Canadian students, L i o n e l Thomas, Takao Tanabe and Donald J a r v i s . L i o n e l Thomas was g r e a t l y i n f l u e n c e d by Hofmann's r o l e as an educator. Both Hofmann and Thomas stimulated t h e i r students and helped t o r a i s e the a r t i s t i c l e v e l of t h e i r i n d i v i d u a l environments. Takao Tanabe s a i d he had r e j e c t e d Hofmann's t h e o r i e s . I f Hofmann was i n f l u e n t i a l on Tanabe, the l a t t e r has c o n s t r i c t e d , denunciated or attempted t o fo r g e t that i n f l u e n c e . J a r v i s c o n t r a s t s both Thomas and Tanabe f o r he n e i t h e r accepts or r e j e c t s Hofmann's teach­i n g s . J a r v i s has, as Hofmann had f i f t y years e a r l i e r i n P a r i s , developed from what he l e a r n t from h i s teacher.

Hofmann's i n f l u e n c e has not ended, f o r Thomas, Tanabe and J a r v i s are teachers and they, w i t h a r t h i s t o r i a n s i n f l u e n c e d by Hofmann, s t i l l propagate h i s t h e o r i e s .

Page 6: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PLATE PAGE

I. "Fantasia," 1943, by Hans Hofmann . . . . 127

II . "Effervescence," 1944, by Hans Hofmann, . . 127

I I I . "Magenta and Blue," 1950, by Hans Hofmann . 128

IV. "Le G i l o t i n , " 1953, by Hans Hofmann . . . 128

V. "Above Deep Waters," 1959, by Hans Hofmann . 129

VI. "Pre-Dawn," I960, by Hans Hofmann . . . . 129

VII. "Landscape of an In t e r i o r Place," 1955,

by Takao Tanabe 130

VIII. "Winter Evening," 1958, by Donald Ja r v i s . . 130

Page 7: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

I would l i k e t o express my g r a t i t u d e t o the Members of the Fine A r t s Department who aided me i n the p r e p a r a t i o n of t h i s t h e s i s . S p e c i a l acknowledgement should be accorded •Mr. W i l l i a m S. Hart, whose guidance and new i n s i g h t s i n t o Hans Hofmann, deepened the scope of my t h e s i s . I appreciate the a s s i s t a n c e given by Miss Melva Dwyer, Miss Diane Cooper and the members of the Fine A r t s D i v i s i o n L i b r a r y . My r e s e a r c h at the U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a at Berkeley was aided by Mrs. Mary Anne C r a f t , Museum R e g i s t r a r , who made the c o l l e c t i o n of Hans Hofmann"s catalogues a v a i l a b l e f o r my use. Also at Berkeley, I would l i k e t o thank Mr. L a r r y Denean, who showed me the U n i v e r s i t y ' s c o l l e c t i o n of Hans Hofmann p a i n t i n g s , and a l s o gave me new i n s i g h t s i n t o Hofmann, the teacher and the a r t i s t . Most of a l l , I would l i k e t o thank Hans Hofmann"s students, Mr. L i o n e l Thomas, Mr. Takao Tanabe and Mr. Donald J a r v i s f o r the time I spent w i t h them d u r i n g our i n t e r v i e w s . Last but not l e a s t , I express my g r a t i t u d e to Miss M a r i l y n M e i s t e r and Mr. Terry Lopston who read over my t h e s i s and t o a l l my f r i e n d s who encouraged and helped me w i t h the p u r s u i t of t h i s t o p i c .

Page 8: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

.CHAPTER I

A SHORT BIOGRAPHICAL STUDY

This t h e s i s concerns Hans Hofmann Ts t h e o r i e s and the p o s s i b l e i n f l u e n c e of h i s t h e o r i e s on a s e l e c t e d number of h i s West-Coast Canadian students. This t h e s i s has been d i v i d e d i n t o three chapters. The f i r s t presents a b r i e f b i o g r a p h i c a l account. The second discusses h i s t h e o r i e s . The t h i r d chapter presents i n t e r v i e w s w i t h L i o n e l Thomas, Takao Tanabe, and Donald J a r v i s , Hofmann's West-Coast Canadian Students.

The career of Hans Hofmann has spanned at l e a s t two generations, two continents and many i n t e r n a t i o n a l borders. His place i n the f i e l d of modern a r t has been e s t a b l i s h e d as an a r t i s t , educator, and exponent of modern a r t . Having taught f o r f o r t y - f i v e years, h i s many students now disseminate throughout the world h i s enthusiasm f o r modern a r t , h i s teachings and h i s methods of t e a c h i n g .

Hofmann's untimely death i n . February, 1966, ended t h i r t y - f i v e years on the American a r t scene. Often thought of as being American-born, he was i n f a c t born i n Weissenburg, Germany on March 21, 1880. He was the second son of a government o f f i c i a l . His youth was spent with h i s

Page 9: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

2

f o u r brothers and s i s t e r s i n the German countryside which shone with the green grass and i r r i d e s c e n t s p a rkle of streams. The young Hans loved the summers he spent at h i s grandfather's farm. Hans was very attached t o h i s grand­f a t h e r who took on the r o l e of f a t h e r s u b s t i t u t e . By the age of s i x t e e n , Hans l e f t home t o work as an a s s i s t a n t to the D i r e c t o r of P u b l i c Works of the State of B a v a r i a . There he was able t o pursue h i s i n t e r e s t i n mathematics and science by using i t s l i b r a r y f a c i l i t i e s . Through science he was able t o survey nature broadly and o b j e c t i v e l y and to supply h i m s e l f with the m a t e r i a l s f o r f u r t h e r c r e a t i v e s p e c u l a t i o n . During these y o u t h f u l y e a r s , s c i e n c e took up most of h i s time but he was s t i l l able t o continue h i s i n t e r e s t i n a r t and music, namely the v i o l i n , piano and organ.

Hofmann*s c r e a t i v e bent l e a d him t o the i n v e n t i o n of an electromagnetic comptometer, a machine s i m i l a r t o the present day c a l c u l a t i n g machine. As he was s t i l l under age, h i s mother had t o s i g n the patent. His f a t h e r , much pleased w i t h h i s son's success, sent the boy a thousand marks, and w i t h t h i s small f o r t u n e , Hofmann embarked on h i s career i n a r t by e n r o l l i n g at a r t school. However, h i s s c i e n t i f i c career was not yet ended; h i s c r e a t i v e c u r i o s i t y l e a d him to develop a submarine s i g n a l device, an , e l e c t r i c bulb that glowed independently of an e l e c t r i c source, and a portable f r e e z i n g u n i t , a l l of which produced no f i n a n c i a l p r o f i t s .

While a t a r t s c h o o l , Hofmann mastered the lessons

Page 10: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

from a succession of teachers; Michailow, Apse, F e r e n z i and Grimwald. He s a i d that these teachers "had a humanizing r a t h e r than a t e c h n i c a l or conceptual i n f l u e n c e on (him)."''" L a t e r Hofmann re-emphasized t h e i r r o l e i n h i s development when he s a i d t h a t " t h e i r lessons were to be the foundation-stone of h i s l a t e r teachings as w e l l as h i s own work." His teachers were unaware of what was happening i n P a r i s , the

3 v i t a l center f o r the development of modern a r t . Hofmann, however, became thoroughly acquainted w i t h the development of modern a r t . Because the lessons and methods of h i s teachers has not been r e v e a l e d , the statement t h a t h i s Munich teachers were i n f l u e n t i a l i n h i s development cannot be taken as f a c t .

I t was through an acquaintance, W i l l i e Schwarz, that Hofmann became aware of P a r i s . W i l l i e t a l k e d of the I m p r e s s i o n i s t s s t a t i n g , "One must observe nature by means of l i g h t r e f l e c t e d from o b j e c t s , r a t h e r than be concerned w i t h t a n g i b l e existence of the objects themselves."^ These ideas 'greatly e x c i t e d Hofmann who became i n c r e a s i n g l y i n v o l v e d w i t h a r t . W i l l i e then introduced him t o a B e r l i n c o l l e c t o r who i n t u r n introduced Hofmann to P h i l i p Freudenberg

"'"Ben Wolf, "The Art Digest Interviews Hans Hofmann," The A r t Digest, v o l . 19, no. 13, A p r i l 1, 1945, p. 52.

2 Hans Hofmann, Search f o r the Real and Other Essays,

Andover,. Mass. , The Addison G a l l e r y of American A r t , 1948, p. 10.

^ I b i d . , p. 11. 4 Loc. c i t .

Page 11: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

4

the c o l l e c t o r ' s wealthy uncle and a department store owner. This meeting must have been very encouraging, f o r P h i l i p be­came Hofmann's patron f o r the next ten years, a v i r t u a l l y unique s i t u a t i o n i n view of the f a c t t h a t most of the great innovators of modern t w e n t i e t h century a r t s u f f e r e d many years of poverty.

Hofmann's patron sent him to P a r i s , the hub of the a r t world during t h i s c r u c i a l p eriod f o r modern a r t (1904-1914). This was the nascent period of Cubism and Fauvism, both important i n the development of Hofmann's l a t e r a r t . At the Cafe du<; Dome he a s s o c i a t e d w i t h George Braque, Pablo P i c a s s o , Juan G r i s , Munk, Kar s t e n , P a s c i n , and C a r l e s . Hofmann was s t r o n g l y i n f l u e n c e d by h i s close f r i e n d s Henri M a t i s s e and Robert Delaunay. Hofmann and Matisse attended the evening c l a s s e s at C o l o r o s s i ' s and painted the same view of the Seine from the same balcony at Hotel B i s s o n . Delauany l i v e d nearby on l a Rue des Grandes Augustins. Hofmann s t a t e d r e c e n t l y that he introduced the work of George Seurat to

5 Robert Delaunay; the l a t t e r ' s impact on Hofmann was h i s

^ W i l l i a m C. S e i t z , Hans Hofmann, New York, Museum of Modern A r t , 1963, p. 7.

Dr. H.L.C. J a f f e , a f r i e n d and w r i t e r of Robert and Sonia Delaunay s a i d i n an i n t e r v i e w on February 25 , 1966, t h a t he does not b e l i e v e Hofmann brought George Seurat to the eye's of Robert Delaunay, Neo-Impressionist's works were i n P a r i s and could have been seen by Delaunay before Hofmann's a r r i v a l i n P a r i s i n 1904.

Page 12: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

5 expressive p o t e n t i a l i n the use of pure c o l o r . ,Delaunay's a p p l i c a t i o n of c o l o r to the c u b i s t space f o r m u l a t i o n was adapted undoubtedly by Hofmann, though he d i d not say so. Art was not the only bond between these two p a i n t e r s . Madame Delaunay's knowledge of German made i t p o s s i b l e f o r her t o t r a n s l a t e f o r Hofmann when h i s French f a i l e d him. In s p i t e of the language b a r r i e r , Hofmann absorbed the c o l o r and f r e e ­dom of the Fauves, the Cubist d i s c i p l i n e of George Braque and Pablo Picasso and the c o l o r and form of Delaunay's Orphism.

In 1910 while Matisse was i n B e r l i n f o r the show given him by C a s s i r e r , he saw P h i l i p Freudenberg's c o l l e c t i o n of Hofmann's work and encouraged the patron to continue support. That same year, Hofmann was a l s o given a one-man show by C a s s i r e r . Support continued u n t i l the s t a r t of World War I i n 1914• Hofmann had returned home t o Munich before the outbreak of the war and remained there f o r the next s i x t e e n y e a r s . Because of a lung l e s i o n , ^ he was not co n s c r i p t e d i n t o the army..

During the war, he opened h i s famous School of Modern A r t . " I opened my school i n Munich i n the s p r i n g of

7 1915 t o c l a r i f y the e n t i r e l y new p i c t o r i a l approach."

^During an i n t e r v i e w , L i o n e l Thomas has s a i d t h a t Hans Hofmann had t u b e r c u l o s i s and was q u i t e s i c k l y during t h i s p e r i o d . Sam Hunter i n h i s book on Hofmann has s a i d t h a t Hofmann had a weak lung.

7 'Hans Hofmann, Hans Hofmann, New York, Harry N.

Abrams, Inc ., 1963, p.12.

Page 13: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

6 The school provided Hofmann w i t h f i n a n c i a l s t a b i l i t y and a l s o enabled him t o d i g e s t and r e s o l v e the problems and s o l u t i o n s which he had adopted during h i s P a r i s i a n sojourn.

At the end of the war, the fame of h i s school spread, r e s u l t i n g i n an i n f l u x of f o r e i g n students t o 4 0 Georgen Strassen i n the suburb of Schwabing.

Throughout t h i s post-war p e r i o d , Hofmann made frequent t r i p s to P a r i s i n order t o keep up w i t h new developments i n modern a r t . Hofmann a l s o e s t a b l i s h e d h i s w e l l known summer schools s u c c e s s i v e l y a t Y u g o s l a v i a , Capri and f i n a l l y St. Tropez. These summer schools were such a success t h a t when he came t o America he r e - e s t a b l i s h e d one at Provincetown, Massachusetts.

Of the American students who attended h i s c l a s s e s i n Europe, Worth Ryder was the most important because he convinced the Regents of the U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a at Berkeley t o ask Hofmann t o teach summer school on t h e i r campus. Hofmann accepted the i n v i t a t i o n and remained i n America u n t i l h i s death. He d i d not r e t u r n t o Germany because h i s w i f e had warned him of the impending war and the u n a p p r e c i a t i v e a t t i t u d e of the N a z i s . She l a t e r j o i n e d him i n America.

The l a c k of artworks previous to 1931 i s due to h i s escape from Nazi Germany. The works t h a t had remained i n Germany were e i t h e r destroyed i n the Second World War or have been l o s t .

Page 14: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

7 In the s p r i n g of 1931, Hofmann taught at the

Chouinard i n Los Angeles and that same year, the C a l i f o r n i a Legion of Honor gave him h i s f i r s t American one-man show. From the time of h i s a r r i v a l i n America, Hofmann was an educator. A f t e r teaching at Chouinard, he taught i n New l o r k at the A r t s Students League f o r two years. Then he opened h i s own well-known school i n 1933• F i r s t l o c a t e d at Lexington Avenue and F i f t y - s e v e n t h S t r e e t , the school l a t e r moved t o F i f t y - s e c o n d S t r e e t and Ninth Avenue and f i n a l l y to E ighth S t r e e t i n h i s Greenwich V i l l a g e l o c a t i o n .

Hofmann's presence i n New York has served t o r a i s e up a c l i m a t e of t a s t e among at l e a s t f i f t y people i n America?, t h a t cannot be matched f o r vigour or c o r r e c t ­ness i n P a r i s or London. No matter how p u z z l i n g and ugly the new and o r i g i n a l w i l l appear—and i t w i l l i n ­deed appear s o — t h e people who i n h a b i t t h i s c l i m a t e w i l l not f a i l t o perceive i t and h a i l i t . 9

Hofmann's long residence i n New York made him almost a legend on the American a r t scene;for over a quarter of a century he taught and supported young American a r t i s t s . His impact i s s t i l l being f e l t , both by second-generation students of h i s own students, and by those a r t i s t s at f i r s t u n f a m i l i a r w i t h h i s t h e o r i e s who learned about the a r t i s t through h i s q u i t e extensive w r i t i n g s on the theory of a r t .

9 Clement Greenberg, "The Present Prospects of Ameri­

can P a i n t i n g and S c u l p t u r e , " Horizon, No. 93-4, October, 1947, p. 29.

Page 15: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

CHAPTER I I

THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN

The t h e o r e t i c a l w r i t i n g s of Hans Hofmann extended over a p e r i o d of a h a l f a century. Although h i s ideas are o f t e n quoted, no study has attempted to break through h i s terminology f o r a thorough explanation of .his t h e o r i e s . In t h i s chapter, h i s w r i t i n g s w i l l be discussed i n r e l a t i o n t o the s t y l e of h i s w r i t i n g s and a c h r o n o l o g i c a l explanation and e l u c i d a t i o n of h i s t h e o r i e s .

I f Hofmann wrote previous to 1931, those w r i t i n g s as were h i s p a i n t i n g s were l o s t or destroyed by the Nazis during the Second World War. Some of these w r i t i n g s could have found t h e i r way t o p r i v a t e c o l l e c t i o n s , but t h e i r whereabouts have never been d i s c l o s e d . Upon h i s a r r i v a l i n America i n 1931, Hofmann published four a r t i c l e s ; one f o r a Berkeley E x h i b i t i o n catalogue, two f o r F o r t n i g h t l y and one f o r the League. A f t e r the l a s t of th a t s e r i e s there i s another gap of s i x t e e n years. I t i s p o s s i b l e t h a t Hofmann wrote d u r i n g t h i s p e r i o d , f o r there i s a c o l l e c t i o n of unpublished w r i t i n g s by Hofmann at the Museum of Modern A r t i n New York and at the U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a at Berkeley. I n 1948 the Hofmann one-man r e t r o s p e c t i v e saw the p u b l i c a -

Page 16: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

t i o n of a monograph at the Addison G a l l e r y of American A r t . This was the most comprehensive summation of Hofmann*s t h e o r i e s t o t h a t date and a l s o included newly developed ideas. In the f o l l o w i n g years Hofmann published r e g u l a r l y , e i t h e r through e x h i b i t i o n catalogue e x p l a n a t i o n s , magazine i n t e r v i e w s or w r i t i n g s f o r magazines. While some of the w r i t i n g s r e i t e r a t e d p r e v i o u s l y published m a t e r i a l , three s i g n i f i c a n t a r t i c l e s appeared; "Space P i c t o r i a l l y R e a l i z e d through the I n t r i n s i c F a c u l t y of Color t o Express Volume," (1951) "The Re s u r r e c t i o n of the P l a s t i c A r t s and The Mystery of Cre a t i v e R e l a t i o n s , " (1953) and "The Color Problem of Pure P a i n t i n g . " (1955) The s u b s t a n t i a l bulk of Hofmann 1s t h e o r i e s i s culminated i n these a r t i c l e s although he s t i l l published up t o 1963, the date of the l a s t i n t e r v i e w . There were a l s o a l a r g e number of monographs and a r t i c l e s on Hofmann a f t e r he had achieved renown i n 1944. This paper w i l l i nclude the published m a t e r i a l up t o the end of January, 1966, when t h i s t h e s i s was being completed.

The s t y l e of Hofmann Ts t h e o r e t i c a l w r i t i n g s i s t y p i c a l l y German, d e t a i l e d and e x a c t i n g , w i t h complicated g r a m a t i c a l c o n s t r u c t i o n s . His e a r l i e s t known w r i t i n g was t r a n s l a t e d from the German by W i l l i a m C. S e i t z i n the Museum of Modern A r t catalogue f o r h i s one-man show there i n 1963. The a r t i c l e s published a f t e r h i s a r r i v a l i n America were t r a n s l a t e d by Glen Wessels and others at the U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a at Berkeley. Wessels' understand-

Page 17: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

10 i n g of Hofmann's ideas enabled him t o t r a n s l a t e Hofmann's d i f f i c u l t Germanic usage i n t o f a i r l y e a s i l y read E n g l i s h . I t i s when he does h i s own t r a n s l a t i o n s that the d i f f i c u l t y of Hofmann's w r i t i n g s a r i s e s . In these l a t e r works, Hofmann's Germanic use of the E n g l i s h language creates a vagueness and i n c o m p r e h e n s i b i l i t y t o the unaccustomed read­er. In u s i n g "a cloudy metaphysical r h e t o r i c , " h i s communica­t i o n i s limited"!" This d i f f i c u l t y of Hofmann's w r i t i n g s does not a r i s e from h i s ideas but from the way he has presented them. As w i l l be seen l a t e r , Hofmann has con­s t r u c t e d h i s thoughts on German syntax and merely t r a n ­s l a t e d them l i t e r a l l y i n t o E n g l i s h , the end product being anomalous to the E n g l i s h reader. This l a s t statement i s not a c r i t i c i s m of Hofmann's w r i t i n g s f o r i t i s understood that he i s not a w r i t e r but a p a i n t e r . He himself undoubted­l y r e a l i z e d h i s ineptness i n expressing himself i n the

E n g l i s h language when he s a i d t h a t an idea has i t s own 2

p e c u l i a r medium through which i t can be expressed. I f the idea happens t o be n o n - l i t e r a r y the person t r y i n g t o express such an idea w i l l be surmounting an overwhelming o b s t a c l e . Hofmann's ideas p a r t i a l l y f a l l i n t o t h i s category when he d i s c u s s e s s p i r i t u a l and metaphysical i d e a s , which are o f t e n

. j — — — Harold Rosenberg, "Hans Hofmann's L i f e C l a s s , "

P o r t f o l i o and A r t News Annual, no.6, Autumn, 1962, p.113. 2 Hans Hofmann, Search f o r the Real and Other Essays,

Andover, Mass., The Addison G a l l e r y of American A r t , i y 4 8 , p.46.

Page 18: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

11

a s s o c i a t e d w i t h a r t . His problem i s t o define h i s terms a c c u r a t e l y and to stay w i t h i n that d e f i n i t i o n w h i l e i n f a c t he' only vaguely d e f i n e s terms and there i s o f t e n change i n meaning 3 Hofmann's i n a b i l i t y to express himself d e r i v e s from the f a c t that E n g l i s h i s not h i s mother tongue and t h a t he i s not g i f t e d i n a v e r b a l sense. While h i s language i s p i c t o r i a l and v i s u a l , he has used the v e r b a l medium t o express to other a r t i s t s and h i s audience h i s t h e o r i e s and ideas concerning a work of a r t .

Hofmann's t h e o r e t i c a l w r i t i n g s have been broadly grouped, c h r o n o l o g i c a l l y , i n t o three areas. Ideas from year t o year do not change r a d i c a l l y but go through a process of development and metamorphosis. The f i r s t group contains the Prospectus of 1915 and the w r i t i n g s of 1931 and 1932

because of the s i m i l a r i t y of ideas and the s c a r c i t y of m a t e r i a l previous t o h i s a r r i v a l t o America. This s e c t i o n i s a c t u a l l y the b a s i s of Hofmann's t h e o r i e s but the language i s not as r e f i n e d and sophistocated as w i l l be seen i n the l a t e r w r i t i n g s . The second group, or s i n g l e monograph discusses the Search f o r the Real of 1948. From t h i s p u b l i c a t i o n a general summation of a l l of Hofmann's t h e o r i e s i s undertaken, r e l a t i n g h i s ideas t o a few p e r t i n e n t p a i n t i n g s of the p e r i o d . The t h i r d group of works contains

3The change i s due o f t e n to the development of i d e a s ; he has l o o s e l y defined the term at the o f f s e t and the development of the idea i s d i f f i c u l t t o a p p r e c i a t e .

Page 19: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

12 the w r i t i n g s done a f t e r 194^. These themselves f a l l i n t o c a t e g o r i e s of time and su b j e c t . The dominant aspect of the development of c o l o r as a formal element culminates i n the 1955 a r t i c l e , "The Color Problem i n Pure P a i n t i n g . " Hofmann's w r i t t e n m a t e r i a l w i l l be discussed i n r e l a t i o n to h i s e a r l i e r m a t e r i a l to show t h e i r development. Again a few chosen p a i n t i n g s w i l l be used t o i l l u s t r a t e Hofmann's ideas i n the a c t u a l realm of h i s p a i n t i n g s . Concluding the d e t a i l e d study of h i s w r i t i n g s w i l l be a general d i s c u s s i o n and summarization of the t h e o r i e s e l u c i d a t e d by Hofmann i n h i s w r i t i n g s . Hofmann's f i r s t group of w r i t i n g s date from 1915 and 1931 - 32. In these a r t i c l e s , Hofmann presented the ideas he absorbed from h i s P a r i s stay and defined h i s stand on a r t f o r h i s new American audience.

The e a r l i e s t e x i s t i n g published w r i t i n g by Hofmann i s a prospectus f o r h i s Munich School of Fine A r t s i n 1915• This piece i s s i g n i f i c a n t f o r i t re v e a l s at an e a r l y stage, h i s t h e o r i e s and teachings which w i l l vary only through development during h i s e n t i r e career. His i n i t i a l statement, "Art does not c o n s i s t i n the o b j e c t i v i z e d i m i t a t i o n of

4 r e a l i t y , " reveals at once h i s place i n the f i e l d of modern a r t . Already before him, Cezanne, M a t i s s e , P i c a s s o , Delaunay, and the members of the p a i n t e r s of P a r i s previous to 1914 were already working i n t h i s manner. Henri Matisse had

^"Hans Hofmann, "Prospectus f o r Munich School of Modern A r t , " 1915, c i t e d i n W i l l i a m C. S e i t z , Hans Hofmann, New York, Museum of Modern A r t , 1963, p. 56.

Page 20: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

13

painted the "Green L i n e , " 1905, a p o r t r a i t of Madame Mat i s s e . Although h i s work e x h i b i t s an i m i t a t i o n of r e a l i t y , Matisse employed c o l o r f o r the c r e a t i o n of e f f e c t s . While the a c t u a l shape of the face i s a l i k e n e s s of Madame Ma t i s s e , Henri Matisse painted the nose and the forehead green. H i s use of c o l o r was "to serve expression as w e l l as p o s s i b l e . " ^ Color i s expressive i n the formation of mood and the q u a l i t y of s p a t i a l r e c e s s i o n and p r o j e c t i o n . The c u b i s t d e r i v e d t h e i r t h e o r i e s from the p a i n t i n g s of Cezanne. The c u b i s t s * i n c l u s i o n of the conceptual approach of I b e r i a n and A f r i c a n s c u l p t u r e can be seen i n Picasso's "Les Desmoiselles d«Avignon," 1907. Hofmann's close f r i e n d Robert Delaunay had already painted h i s "Sun Disks," 1912, where o b j e c t i v e r e a l i t y cannot be seen at a l l . Delaunay played w i t h h i s d i s c o i d shapes and pure c o l o r s t o achieve a p e r c e i v a b l y luminous and v i b r a n t surface animation. Hofmann Ts non-o b j e c t i v e approach to a r t revealed a s i m i l a r i t y to h i s cl o s e P a r i s i a n f r i e n d s Henri Matisse and Robert Delaunay. This s i m i l a r i t y suggests t h e i r p o s s i b l e i n f l u e n c e on Hofmann.

Hofmann's contact w i t h the P a r i s i a n a r t i s t ' s i s

'Henri M a t i s s e , "Notes of a P a i n t e r . " (1908) c i t e d i n A l f r e d H. Barr, J r . , M a t i s s e : His A r t and His P u b l i c , New York,. The Museum of Modern A r t , 195T7~p7T2"i.

Page 21: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

14 6

s i g n i f i c a n t f o r they gave him the b a s i s of h i s i d e a l s . During h i s Munich per i o d Hofmann presented t o h i s students a coherently formulated theory of a r t derived from h i s P a r i s i a n f r i e n d s . These t h e o r i e s were n e c e s s i t a t e d by the mere f a c t of teaching. Students were eager f o r an organized system which he had developed over the years. Hofmann stat e d i n h i s Prospectus f o r the young a r t i s t s , that he himse l f t r i e d t o "detach from schools and d i r e c t i o n s , t o

7 evolve a p e r s o n a l i t y of h i s own."'

His Prospectus f o r the Munich School was h i s f i r s t concrete f o r m u l a t i o n of what he had l e a r n t i n P a r i s . In i t he discusses form and nature, c r e a t i v e expression, a r t i s t s , and a work of a r t . He b e l i e v e d t h a t form i n p a i n t i n g was stimulated by nature, though i t was not bound t o nature i n o b j e c t i v e i m i t a t i o n . Nature was the source of i n s p i r a t i o n f o r the s e n s i t i v e a r t i s t . He would a l s o be a f f e c t e d by the medium employed, through which the i n s p i r a t i o n was t r a n s ­formed by him i n t o the r e a l i t y of the p a i n t i n g . " C r e a t i v e expression i s thus the s p i r i t u a l t r a n s l a t i o n of inner con­cepts i n t o form, r e s u l t i n g from the f u s i o n of these

^Who i s a c t u a l l y i n f l u e n t i a l and what were the ba s i s f o r these i n f l u e n c e s cannot be s t a t e d d e f i n i t e l y f o r Hofmann does not t a l k or w r i t e about h i s P a r i s years. When the un­published paper held by the Museum of Modern A r t , Glenn Wessels and the U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a at Berkeley are r e ­vealed, i t may be p o s s i b l e t o a s c e r t a i n the a c t u a l f a c t s of t h i s p e r i o d . Without these papers, i t would be pure academic heresay to l i s t by whom and how Hofmann was a c t u a l l y i n f l u e n c e d .

7Hofmann, "Prospectus f o r Munich School...,"1915,P.56.

Page 22: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

i n t u i t i o n s w i t h a r t i s t i c means of expression i n a u n i t y of s p i r i t and form, brought about by i n t u i t i o n which i n t u r n r e s u l t s from the f u n c t i o n i n g of the e n t i r e thought and f e e l i n g complex accompanied by vigorous c o n t r o l of s p i r i t u a l means." The above sentence, c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of Hofmann*s w r i t i n g s t y l e , means i n essence that a p a i n t i n g (the c r e a t i v e expression) i s the combination of nature and the medium. Nature i n s p i r e s i n the a r t i s t a thought p a t t e r n which r e s u l t s i n s p i r i t and the form of the p a i n t i n g . These two q u a l i t i e s are then combined w i t h the medium and the i n s p i r a t i o n from the medium, a l l under the c o n t r o l of the mental processes. There r e s u l t s a f u s i o n of a mental process with the p h y s i c a l means of expression.

"A work of a r t i s i n s p i r i t a s e l f contained whole, whose s p i r i t u a l and s t r u c t u r a l r e l a t i o n s h i p permit no i n d i v i d u a l p a r ts despite the m u l t i p l i c i t y of depicted o b j e c t s . " ^ Hofmann*s d e f i n i t i o n of a r t i s a combination of the two systems of organism; the f i r s t system being an organic whole i n which "every element w i t h i n i t , i m p l i e s every other, ""^and the second being a system i n which "an

L o c . c i t . 9 L o c . c i t .

^ S t e p h e n C. Pepper, World Hypotheses, a Study i n Evidence, Berkeley, U n i v e r s i t y of u a i i r o r n i a , 19V2, P.300. ...

Page 23: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

16

a l t e r a t i o n or removal of any element would a l t e r every other n

element or even dest r o y the whole system." T h i s o r g a n i s t i c

s t r u c t u r e of Hofmann's theory of a r t i s , i n p a r t , one of the

determinates of Hofmann's l o n g and complicated s t y l e of

w r i t i n g . Once he has mentioned one aspect of the theory, i t

i m p l i e s another and cannot be thought of as complete u n t i l

i t has the other f a c t s added t o i t ,

In the s e r i e s of a r t i c l e s w r i t t e n a f t e r Hofmann's

a r r i v a l i n America i n 1931, the o r g a n i s t i c s t r u c t u r e of h i s

th e o r y can be seen w e l l . While d e a l i n g with a l l aspects of

a r t such as laws, r e a l i t y and appearance, s p i r i t u a l p r o j e c t i o n ,

medium of e x p r e s s i o n , f o r m a l and c r e a t i v e elements, depth and

movement, t e a c h i n g , symphonic and d e c o r a t i v e p a i n t i n g , he a l s o

t o l d of a r t s r e l a t i o n t o c u l t u r e .

Any a r t form or c u l t u r a l p u r s u i t , he b e l i e v e d , "en-12

r i c h e d and gave deeper content t o l i f e . " L i k e a r e l i g i o u s

f e e l i n g , a r t a l s o searched " t o understand the essence of a l l

t h i n g s . " ^ " A r t i s t i c e x p r e s s i o n and a p p r e c i a t i o n was

necessary t o counter-balance l i f e . " * ^ A r t to him was an

e s s e n t i a l t o l i f e as food i s . I t g i v e s power and " s a t i s f i e s

the s o u l . " x ! L o c . c i t . 12

Hans Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " F o r t n i g h t l y , v o l . 1, no. 1, September 11, 1931, p.6.

^ L o c . c i t .

^Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " p.7.

Page 24: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

17 Because of a r t ' s a b i l i t y to energize the observer,

the aim of a r t i s t o " v i t a l i z e form by organic r e l a t i o n s h i p s between the formal elements, w i t h c o l o r and l i g h t i n t e g r a t e d

15 i n t o the planes." In p a i n t i n g , the e f f e c t of the v i t a l i z e d form must take i n t o account the Laws of P a i n t i n g , namely:

1. The e n t i t y of the p i c t u r e plane must be preserved. 2. The essence of the p i c t u r e plane i s i t s two dimension­

a l i t y which must achieve three d i m e n s i o n a l i t y by means of the c r e a t i v e process.

3. In c o l o r i n g , the surface of the canvas should r e c e i v e the greatest p o s s i b l e r i c h n e s s i n l i g h t emanation e f f e c t s , and at the same time should r e t a i n the t r a n s ­parency of a j e w e l . "

These laws were founded on the b a s i s of our perception of r e a l i t y and appearances. Hans Hofmann discussed h i s concept of perception i n an A r t i c l e , " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " published i n the League 1932. What one sees i n the e x t e r i o r world, "appearance," i s two dimensional while i n a c t u a l f a c t , that w o r l d , r e a l i t y , i s three dimensional. "We see r e a l i t y only through appearance which i n t u r n has the e f f e c t upon us of

17 being a three dimensional r e a l i t y . " The d i f f e r e n c e betwe "appearance" and " e f f e c t " i s th a t the former i s based on

I b i d . , p. 5. 16

Hans Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " F o r t n i g h t l y , v o l . 1, no. 13, February.26, 1932, p. 10.

1 7Hans Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " (1932), c i t e d i n Hans Hofmann, New York, Harry N. Abrams, 1963, p. 35.

Page 25: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

18

seeing alone whereas " e f f e c t " i s the r e s u l t of the appearance

from a certain experience. " E f f e c t s , " then, that come from

an o i l painting, are independent of the o i l paints themselves

but they produce these effects because "the; paints are set 18

together i n t h e i r s p i r i t u a l r e l a t i o n s h i p . " Their placement

creates what Hofmann c a l l s a " s u p e r - r e a l i s t i c e f f e c t , " " ^ being

i n f a c t an emotional reaction. The s u p e r - r e a l i s t i c i s con­

tained i n the e f f e c t of a thing rather than i n a c t u a l i t y .

"What i n a two-dimensional f i x a t i o n of appearance would perhaps

only be the difference of a f r a c t i o n of a millimeter would as effe c t under certain circumstances mean an i n f i n i t y i n a work

20

of a r t . " The combination of the senses affords i n "our

s p i r i t u a l projection the emotional experience (which) can be

gathered together as an inner perception by which we can com­

prehend the essence of things beyond mere bare sensory ex­

perience. "21 This extended inward experience enables the

viewer to get to the heart and c r u c i a l factors of the object

and to see i t i n a l l i t s r e l a t i o n s and connections. "The

s p i r i t u a l projection or contemplation develops the sense of

space because a l l of our sensory apparatus i s required." -^Loc. c i t .

^ L o c . c i t . 2 Q L o c . c i t . 21

Hofman, " P l a s t i c Creation," p.36. 22

L o c . c i t .

Page 26: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

19 The experience of space which i s d i s c l o s e d t o us by the sub­j e c t i v e s p i r i t u a l p r o j e c t i o n of the impulses i s a p l a s t i c and l i v i n g u n i t y . This l a s t statement r e f l e c t s Hofmann's aim of a r t — t h e v i t a l i z a t i o n of form. We experience space i n a p a i n t ­i n g by the a c t i v a t i o n of our senses. Therefore, i f an a r t i s t wishes t o create a p a i n t i n g , he must s t r i v e t o a f f e c t the viewer w i t h a c t i o n and v i t a l i t y from the form and c o l o r p a i n t ­ed on the canvas.

The process of c r e a t i o n i s based upon the power t o present and to s p i r i t u a l l y p r o j e c t . The s p i r i t u a l i n t e r p r e t a -

23

t i o n of the medium of expression i s the r e s u l t of such power. In t h i s way expression medium i s a r e s u l t of such powers. In t h i s way, the c r e a t i v i t y of an a r t i s t depends on h i s general a b i l i t y t o p r o j e c t s p i r i t u a l l y and h i s s p e c i f i c a b i l i t y t o empathize and to r e c e i v e from the medium of expression. A more encompassing statement of c r e a t i o n by Hofmann appeared a year previous to the one sighted above. In the e a r l i e r one he s a i d t h a t c r e a t i o n was dependent on nature's law, the a r t i s t ' s s p i r i t u a l contact w i t h nature and the medium of expression. "The c r e a t i v e a r t i s t i s t o p a r a l l e l nature's c r e a t i v i t y by t r a n s l a t i n g the impulse received from nature i n t o the medium

2ZL of expression and thus v i t a l i z e t h i s medium." ^ The apparent

2 3 L o c . c i t . 2.L

Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g and Culture," 1931 , P«6.

Page 27: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

d i f f e r e n c e s w i t h these two statements i s the i n c l u s i o n i n the e a r l i e r v e r s i o n of "nature's law" and "medium of expression." While i t i s not st a t e d i n the 1932 v e r s i o n , Hofmann does r e f e r to these two q u a l i t i e s when he s a i d that " c r e a t i v i t y i n the c r e a t i v e process i s based upon an experience (knowledge of nature's law s ) , which simultaneously a l s o s t i m u l a t e d the essence of the medium through which the a r t i s t i c expression

25 r e s u l t s . " ' Therefore the apparent d i f f e r e n c e a r i s e s only because of Hofmann's usage of the E n g l i s h language.

A s l i g h t v a r i a t i o n i n language i s a l s o seen i n the d i s c u s s i o n of medium. This m o d i f i c a t i o n can be r e l a t e d , a s i n the previous case, probably t o Glenn Wessels' more f l u e n t t r a n s l a t i o n i n t o the E n g l i s h language. In both, the nature of the medium must be mastered. In the 1931 a r t i c l e , i t s t a t e s that "the medium can be made t o resonate and v i b r a t e when stimulated by the impulse coming d i r e c t l y from the

26

n a t u r a l world," while i n the 1932 a r t i c l e , the medium of expression can be set i n t o v i b r a t i o n and t e n s i o n by mastery of the p r i n c i p l e s and meaning of the nature of the medium, "which has has i t s own laws, which are t o be e x c l u s i v e l y mastered i n t u i t i v e l y out of the development of the c r e a t i o n . " ^

2 5Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " 1932,p.36.

2 6Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1932, p.7. 27 'Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " 1932, p.36.

Page 28: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

21 The e a r l i e r a r t i c l e s t a t e s that the impulse of nature through the a r t i s t ' s mind can s t i r him t o c r e a t i v i t y i f he has mastered the medium whil e the l a t t e r says that the medium can be "mastered i n t u i t i v e l y out of the development of the c r e a t i o n . " The l a t e r a r t i c l e shows that the a r t i s t can s t i l l create a great work whi l e searching the pos­s i b i l i t i e s of the medium, f o r the " p o s s i b i l i t i e s of the

28 medium are u n l i m i t e d . "

In the 1932 s e c t i o n Hofmann broadened the range of p o s s i b i l i t i e s of a medium wh i l e i n the s e c t i o n concerning the elements of a p a i n t i n g he t i g h t e n e d up and f u r t h e r de­f i n e d . The two a r t i c l e s d i f f e r e n t i a t e between formal and c r e a t i v e elements. "The formal elements i n p a i n t i n g are l i n e , plane, volume and the r e s u l t i n g complexes. These are

29 elements of c o n s t r u c t i o n f o r a v i t a l i z e d a r t . " The v i t a -l i z a t i o n d e r i v e s from " l i g h t and c o l o r i n t e g r a t e d i n t o

30 planes." Color and l i g h t are c r e a t i v e elements f o r they v i t a l i z e the formal elements. The p e c u l i a r i t y w i t h i n these statements centers around the a d j e c t i v a l m o d i f i e r s , "formal" and " c r e a t i v e . " W ithin these two words there i s a u n i f y i n g f a c t o r f o r the elements of p a i n t i n g . Planes are discussed i n both formal and c r e a t i v e elements. I t appears as i f Hofmann has made an a r b i t r a r y d i f f e r e n t i a t i o n when i n f a c t 28

Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " 1931, p. 6. 29 'Hans Hofmann, c i t e d i n Hans Hofmann E x h i b i t i o n Cata­

logue, Aug. 5-22, Berkeley, U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a , 1931. 30 T

Loc. c i t .

Page 29: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

22

t h e t w o a r e r e l a t e d ; o n e u s e s t h e f o r m a l e l e m e n t s f o r t h e

c r e a t i v e a c t i n p a i n t i n g . I t s e e m s p e c u l i a r t o d i f f e r e n ­

t i a t e f r o m c r e a t i v e ^ a n d f o r m a l a s p e c t s o f a p a i n t i n g b y

m e r e l y c o l o r a n d l i g h t , w h i l e t h e o t h e r q u a l i t i e s a r e i n ­

h e r e n t i n b o t h . " A r e n o t t h e s e d i s c r e p e n c i e s p o s s i b l y

c a u s e d b y H o f m a n n ' s i n e p t n e s s w i t h t h e E n g l i s h l a n g u a g e

a n d p o s s i b l y h i s t r a n s l a t o r s ' m i s i n t e r p r e t a t i o n ?

H o f m a n n ' s f o r m a l e l e m e n t s a r e s i m i l a r t o P a u l K l e e ' s

f o r m a t i v e e l e m e n t s . K l e e d i s c u s s e d t h e movement o f t h e

p o i n t t o f o r m a l i n e a n d t h e l i n e ' s movement t o f o r m a

31

p l a n e . H o f m a n n a n d K l e e i n c o r p o r a t e d t h e l i n e a n d t h e

p l a n e i n t o t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e f o r m a l e l e m e n t s . K l e e d i f f e r e d

f r o m H o f m a n n b y s t a t i n g t h e o r i g i n o f t h e l i n e t o t h e

p o i n t w h e r e a s H o f m a n n f u r t h e r d e f i n e d t h e p l a n e . I t j o i n s

w i t h o t h e r p l a n e s t o f o r m v o l u m e s a n d f o r m a l c o m p l e x e s . A

v a r i a t i o n o f t h e i r f o r m a l e l e m e n t s i s s e e n b e c a u s e e a c h h a s

d e v e l o p e d e i t h e r t h e p o i n t o r t h e l i n e . B o t h , h o w e v e r , i n ­

c o r p o r a t e t h e l i n e a n d t h e p l a n e . T h i s s i m i l a r i t y a n d

H o f m a n n ' s l a t e r d e v e l o p m e n t f r o m t h e l i n e a r c o n c e p t t o t h e

p l a n a r c o n c e p t s u g g e s t s t h a t H o f m a n n knew o f K l e e ' s w r i t ­

i n g s . B o t h w r i t e r s a l s o d i s c u s s e d m o v e m e n t , t h e s u b j e c t i v e

t h e o r y o f s p a c e a n d r e l a t i o n s h i p o f c o l o r s . No p u b l i s h e d

m a t e r i a l h a s a p p e a r e d c o n c e r n i n g a n y c o n t a c t b e t w e e n H o f m a n n 31

P a u l K l e e , " F r o m P o i n t t o L i n e , " c i t e d i n J u r g S p i l l e r , P a u l K l e e : The T h i n k i n g E y e , New Y o r k , G e o r g e W i t t e n b o r n , 1 9 6 1 , p p . 103 - 1 2 0 .

Page 30: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

23

and Klee, but Hofmann did mention the Bauhaus with which

Klee was associated.

Hofmann used the formal and creative elements to

create forms i n space. Unlike Renaissance painters he did

not create a space, a hole-in-the-wall with forms placed

within i t . But rather he, as h i s Parisian friends had done,

solved the form problem i n r e l a t i o n to the picture plane 3 2

because "form exists through space and space through form." 3 3

"Form must be balanced by space," and vice versa. "What

exists i n form must also exist i n space." 3 4 Space and form

are i n t e r r e l a t e d i n that the "space i n an object incor­

porates the objective world i n i t s l i m i t s , and space i n 3 5

front of and behind the object, i n f i n i t y . " The further

r e l a t i o n s h i p between form and space can be seen i n Hofmann's

discussion of posit i v e and negative space. "The conception

of the vacancy, the u n f u l f i l l e d space' as a negative form

i s necessary to reconcile the posit i v e form, the f u l f i l l e d

space and i s therefore an object." The unity of form

and space to the t o t a l space "exists i n three dimensions

which corresponds to the two dimensional quality of the 3 7

picture plane." "The object world and the sum of a l l 3 2Hofmann, " P l a s t i c Creation," 1932, p. 37. 3 3Hofmann, "On the Aims of Art," 1932, p. 10.

Lionel Thomas. Interview with writer, Jan. 16 , 1966. 3 5Hofmann, " P l a s t i c Creation," 1932, p. 37 . 3^Loc. c i t . 3 7Hofmann, "On the Aims of Art," 1932, p. 10.

Page 31: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

24

t h r e e dimensional elements g i v e s us i n the o p i t c a l manifes­

t a t i o n , the two dimensional space f u l f i l l m e n t i n the ap­

pearance of nature, the form and space problem i s i d e n t i c a l 38

w i t h the essence of the p i c t u r e p l a n e . " "We see the two dimensional (appearance by the q u a l i t y of the p i c t u r e plane)

39 but we comprehend the t h r e e dimensional ( e f f e c t ) . " There­

f o r e the s o l u t i o n of a p a i n t i n g on the two dimensional p i c ­

t u r e plane i s p a r a l l e l e d ' t o o p t i c a l v i s i o n i n which a two

dimensional appearance has the e f f e c t of a t h r e e dimensional

m a n i f e s t a t i o n . In a c h i e v i n g the t h r e e dimensional e f f e c t ,

one must remember not to destr o y the inh e r e n t two dimension­

a l i t y of the p i c t u r e plane, as s t a t e d i n Hofmann's P a i n t i n g

Laws. "One can p l a c e t h r e e dimensional forms on the p i c t u r e

plane without d i s t u r b i n g the two dimensional q u a l i t y of the

p i c t u r e plane s i n c e the appearance and the p i c t u r e plane

(both two dimensional) are i d e n t i c a l i n t h e i r e s s e n c e . " ^

In a c h i e v i n g a sense of the t h r e e d i m e n s i o n a l , depth,

"a sense of movement d e v e l o p s . " ^ That movement i s merely

i l l u s o r y . The a b i l i t y t o c r e a t e the i l l u s i o n determines

the q u a l i t y of the work f o r "Movement does not e x i s t without

l i f e [and] movement i s the e x p r e s s i o n of l i f e . . . . E n l i v e n ­e d

Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " 1 9 3 2 , p. 3 7 . 3 9 I b i d . , p. 3 8 . 4 0 T . • Loc. c i t .

^ L o c . c i t .

Page 32: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

ment depends on the f a c i l i t y f o r emotional experiencing i n the a r t i s t , which i n i t s t u r n , determines the degree of s p i r i t u a l p r o j e c t i o n i n t o the medium of expression."

These movements and depths can be achieved by the p s y c h o l o g i c a l expression of c o l o r , not merely as a mood or an emotional tone but by the j u x t a p o s i t i o n of c o l o r s t o achieve the p r o j e c t i o n of one c o l o r area i n r e l a t i o n t o the r e c e s s i o n of another. This theory of the dynamic q u a l i t y of c o l o r i s expanded i n the 1951 a r t i c l e "Space P i c t o r i a l l y R e a l i z e d through the I n t r i n s i c F a c u l t y of the Colors t o Express Volumes," which w i l l be discussed l a t e r .

In 1 9 3 1 , Hofmann set up two c a t e g o r i e s , the formal elements and the c r e a t i v e elements. Color was attached t o form. Formal elements c o n s i s t e d of l i n e s planes and the r e s u l t i n g formal complexes. C r e a t i v e elements c o n s i s t e d of l i g h t and c o l o r i n t e g r a t e d i n t o planes. These two c a t e g o r i e s of elements were synthesized i n 1 9 3 2 . Formal and c r e a t i v e elements became one. Hofmann s t a t e d , "Color i s only an e f f e c t of l i g h t on form i n r e l a t i o n t o form and i t s inherent t e x t u r e . . . . Form e x i s t s because of l i g h t and l i g h t by means of form."*4'3 Hofmann r e a l i z e d that c o l o r and

^ L o c . c i t .

^Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " 1 9 3 2 , p.36.

Page 33: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

26 form had t o c o e x i s t . They were mutually dependent on each other. This dependence r e f l e c t s Hofmann's o r g a n i s t i c theory i n which each f a c t o r i m p l i e s another and no one f a c ­t o r can be l e f t out. Formal elements imply c r e a t i v e e l e ­ments, and v i c e versa. The two d i s t i n c t c l a s s e s of 1931 are combined t o form one i n 1932.

The f u r t h e r i n c l u s i v e n e s s of h i s theory i s seen i n the r e l a t i o n s h i p between form and space i n which form ex­i s t s because of space and space e x i s t s because of form, which i n t u r n e x i s t s only by the means of l i g h t and v i c e versa. He then continues the u n i f i e d c o n f i g u r a t i o n by say­i n g t h a t the e f f e c t of l i g h t i n r e l a t i o n t o i t s form and i t s inherent t e x t u r e i s c o l o r . From t h i s i t can be seen that he r e l a t e s form w i t h space, l i g h t and c o l o r . A l l the above i n t e r r e l a t i o n s h i p s must be arranged so as t o be based on the concept of s p a t i a l u n i t y , the r e l a t i o n between form and space. Because l i g h t i s r e l a t e d t o form and form t o space, l i g h t u n i t y i s r e l a t e d t o s p a t i a l u n i t y . L i g h t u n i t y i s created by the understanding of the e f f e c t of l i g h t complexes and by the " c r e a t i o n of a c o l o r u n i t y " 4 4

achieved when the r e c e s s i o n and p r o j e c t i o n of c o l o r i s understood and when t o n a l gradations are taken i n t o account.

4 4 I b i d . , p. 37.

Page 34: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

27 This incompassing outlook required, by the a r t i s t ' s

t o t a l mental functioning i s a facet of Hofmann's i d e a l .

Through the complete occupation of the mind, a s p i r i t u a l

r e a l i z a t i o n can be attained by the sensitive a r t i s t . This

r e a l i z a t i o n i s the only way of externalizing the mental

function, or as Hofmann c a l l s i t , inner sensation. "When

the impulses which emotionalize the a r t i s t , are integrated

with the medium of expression, every motivation of the soul

can be translated into a s p i r i t u a l motivation" 4^ as seen i n

the entity of the painting.

"This work of art i s the product of the a r t i s t ' s

power f o r conscious f e e l i n g and of h i s s e n s i t i v i t y to l i f e

i n nature and l i f e within the l i m i t s of his medium."4^

That work of art r e f l e c t s the "sensorial and emotional world i n

f o r the a r t i s t . " It i s "sensory raw material blended to i d

a s p i r i t u a l unity through the legitimate use of the medium."

Through exaggerated d i f f e r e n t i a t i o n the painting

acquires the highest enrichment of i t s surface. It becomes monumental "by the most exact and refined r e l a t i o n between

/. Q

the p a r t s . " ^ This type of painting i s known as Symphonic

for by, with and from color, form i s i n t e n s i f i e d i n sub-L 5 ^Hofmann, Exhibition Catalogue, Berkeley, 1931. 4 6Hofmann, "Painting and Culture," 1931, p. 6. 4 7Hofmann, "On the Aims of Painting," 1932, p. 7. 4 8 I b i d . ' , p. 8. 4 9 I b i d . , p. 9.

Page 35: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

2B

ordination to s p a t i a l and s p i r i t u a l unity i n large present­

a t i o n a l areas of l i g h t and form. Color i s the r e a l b u i l d i n g 50

medium in symphonic painting."^ Hofmann says that i n t h i s way, color attains the greatest f u l l n e s s and form the great-

51 est richness as Cezanne achieved i n his work. Colors are

made to project and to recede by the means of an i n t e r v a l ,

being "color planes standing i n greatest contrast as possible

to a l l i t s neighbours within the balance of the whole."52

Hofmann*s use of the musical term, Symphonic, f o r a

certain class of paintings could imply his knowledge of

Wassily Kandinsky's Concerning the S p i r i t u a l i n Art, i n 53

which symphonic and melodic painting styles are discussed.

Kandinsky and Hofmann also discussed Nature as the source of

inspiration,inner feelings and the psychological and

p h y s i o l o g i c a l effect of color to produce three dimensional

space and form. Although Kandinsky's book was generally

read by the avant garde, a f t e r i t s publication i n 1912, by

that time Hofmann would have heard of the synesthetic idea

of r e l a t i n g painting to music. Synesthesia had been fo r a

long time a European t r a d i t i o n when Hofmann arrived i n

5QLoc.cit.

^ L o c . c i t .

^ ^ L o c . c i t . 5 3Wassily Kandinsky, Concerning the S p i r i t u a l i n Art,

(1912), New York, Wittenborn, Schultz, Inc., 1947.

Page 36: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

29

P a r i s i n 1904. P o s s i b l y i n P a r i s he heard of Kandinsky's Concerning the S p i r i t u a l i n Art though Hofmann never wrote or spoke of such a contact. I f Hofmann had read Kandinsky's book, i t was probably a f t e r h i s r e t u r n t o Munich i n 1914. However Clement Greenberg b e l i e v e s t h a t Kandinsky had no i n f l u e n c e on the t h e o r i e s of Hofmann be­cause by the time Hofmann had returned t o Germany i n 1914, h i s t h e o r i e s had already been formulated from the great

54 French masters of the tw e n t i e t h century.

Hofmann was not consistent i n u s i n g musical terms t o c l a s s p a i n t i n g s . His other category of p a i n t i n g s was c a l l e d d e c o r a t i v e . Decorative p a i n t i n g employs some aspects of symphonic p a i n t i n g but the former emphasizes the greatest s i m p l i f i c a t i o n . I n t e l l e c t and emotion are used f o r the common end of s i m p l i c i t y . Often t h i s can l e a d to a b s t r a c t i o n when "rhythmic r e l a t i o n s conditioned by space and musical c o n t a c t s " ^ a r e taken i n t o account. Always the problem of space must be pe r f e c t f o r "the w a l l must remain a w a l l and the p i c t u r e must remain a p i c t u r e . " One must not create a h o l e - i n - t h e - w a l l as the p a i n t e r s of the Renainssance had pe r f e c t e d . This does not mean that

^^Clement Greenberg, Hofmann, P a r i s , George F a l l , 1961, p.16.

5 5Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1932, p.10.

- ^ L o c . c i t .

Page 37: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

3Q o b j e c t i v e v a l u e s cannot be used f o r i t i s i n D e c o r a t i v e

p a i n t i n g t h a t " o b j e c t i v e v a l u e s are made more e f f e c t i v e 57

by r h y t h m i c r e l a t i o n s . " ' These o b j e c t i v e v a l u e s are

not m e r e l y t a s t e f u l l y and f a n c i f u l l y a r r a n g e d b u t r e q u i r e

t h e same procedure as t h o s e of Symphonic p a i n t i n g .

D e c o r a t i v e p a i n t i n g becomes a g r e a t d e s i g n i f t h e

a r t i s t i s a b l e " t o s i m p l i f y t o t h e e s s e n t i a l s and t o eg

o r g a n i z e t h e e v e r p r e s e n t l i f e e s s e n t i a l s . " "Great

p i c t o r i a l c r e a t i o n i s a c h i e v e d by a h i g h l y d e v e l o p e d

s e n s i b i l i t y as r e g a r d s the n a t u r a l w o r l d and upon s t r o n g

p i c t o r i a l f e e l i n g . I t may c a r r y a d d i t i o n a l burden o f 59

t h e l i t e r a r y , dogmatic o r p o l i t i c a l , " but i t i s n o t

n e c e s s a r y . Through a r t one i s a b l e t o become i m m o r t a l i f

he i s " a b l e t o pervade h i s work w i t h h i s s o u l and s p i r i t .

I t i s the s p i r i t u a l and m e n t a l c o n t e n t of the work of

a r t t h a t i s t h e q u a l i t y i n a p a i n t i n g and not t h e a l l e g o r y

o r s y m b o l l i c meaning.

B e s i d e s t h e above m a t e r i a l on t h e t h e o r y o f a r t i n

p a i n t i n g , Hofmann b e i n g a t e a c h e r d i s c u s s e d h i s o t h e r p r o ­

f e s s i o n a l f i e l d , t e a c h i n g . A r t can o n l y be t a u g h t t o one 57Hofmann, "On t h e Aims o f A r t , " 1932, p.9.

^ L o c . c i t .

^ Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1932, p . l l . 60T

L o c . c i t .

Page 38: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

31

who possesses a " h i g h l y developed s e n s i t i v i t y f o r q u a l i t y . The laymen who understands a r t through a r e c e p t i v e ex­perience shares p a s s i v e l y what the a r t i s t out of product-ive experience f e e l s and c r e a t e s . " The teacher must d i r e c t students toward the "enrichment of t h e i r l i f e , guide t h e i r p e r s o n a l i t y and develop t h e i r s e n s i b i l i t y t o T f e e l i n t o ' ^ 2 animate or inanimate t h i n g s w i t h sympathy."^ 3

"By enforced d i s c i p l i n e , he shortens the road t o understand­i n g and develops the students n a t u r a l endowments."^4 The teacher most of a l l must have "the power of quick sympathy

and understanding t o produce a r t i s t s , comprehending te a c h e r s , a r t understanding and a r t enjoyment i n general.

For the next f i f t e e n years Hans Hofmann d i d not p u b l i s h but i n the formative years of the "American-type p a i n t i n g " or "Abstract Expressionism" he f o l l o w e d h i s d i r e c t i o n s f o r a teacher and helped d i r e c t the new genera­t i o n of American a r t i s t s to t h e i r form of a r t . Although none of the members of the s o - c a l l e d New York School of

6lHofmann, " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " 1931, p.5. Zip

" F e e l i n t o " could be a l s o t r a n s l a t e d as empathy because these two terms are t r a n s l a t e d i n t o the same German word, d i e Einfuhlung. Hofmann Ts l a t e r 1952 de­f i n i t i o n of word empathy in c l u d e s a r t i s t i c r e a l i z a t i o n .

^Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " 1931, p.6. 6 4 I b i d . , p.7. 6 5 I b i d . , p..6.

Page 39: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

32 Abstract Expressionism attended Hofmann's c l a s s e s , h i s presence i n v i g o r a t e d the New York a r t scene. He brought over from Europe the ideas of the Fauves and the Cubists which could be seen i n h i s work of t h i s p e r i o d . His weekly c r i t i c i s m s of student's work was o f t e n attend­ed by members of the a r t c i r c l e i n the Greenwich V i l l a g e area. He belonged to the "Club" whose members included the a b s t r a c t e x p r e s s i o n i s t s .

During the m i d - f o r t i e s the a b s t r a c t e x p r e s s i o n i s t s began t o r e c e i v e a t t e n t i o n and r e c o g n i t i o n . I t i s i n t h i s p e r i o d , 1944, that Hans Hofmann had h i s f i r s t one-man show i n New York at Peggy Guggenheim's "Art of t h i s Century G a l l e r y . " He held e x h i b i t i o n s y e a r l y i n New York, mainly at the Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y .

Also d u r i n g the m i d - f o r t i e s , Hofmann taught a number of West-Coast Canadian a r t i s t s who w i l l be discussed l a t e r i n the paper.

The most important event of t h i s period f o r Hofmann was perhaps h i s one-man r e t r o s p e c t i v e show at the Addison G a l l e r y of American Art i n Andover, Massachusetts. At that show, a monograph-catalogue was published c o n t a i n i n g some of h i s teachings, older essays, the new a r t i c l e "The Search f o r the Real i n the V i s u a l A r t s , " and h i s well-known theory

66 Donald J a r v i s , Interview w i t h w r i t e r , February 1,

1966.

Page 40: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

33 of "push and p u l l . " As t h i s p u b l i c a t i o n was widely read by a r t i s t s and comprises the second period of Hofmann*s w r i t i n g s , a d e t a i l d i s c u s s i o n w i l l now be considered w i t h reference t o h i s e a r l i e r w r i t i n g s of 1931 and 1932.

Fundamentally, The Search f o r the Real does not vary a great d e a l from Hofmann's e a r l i e r w r i t i n g s . The f i f t e e n years i n America has improved h i s w r i t i n g s t y l e and c l a r i f i e d h i s thought. This c l a r i f i c a t i o n was un­doubtedly r e i n f o r c e d by the a r t i s t i c community of New York and h i s n e c e s s i t y of an organized concept which was present­ed t o h i s students. In t h i s monograph Hofmann presented i n the now famous terms, "push and p u l l , " "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n . " These movements, as seen i n a p a i n t i n g , are exp l a i n e d i n r e l a t i o n t o the problem of form and c o l o r and t h e i r r e l a t i o n s h i p to the f i n e and a p p l i e d a r t s . These t h e o r i e s of Hofmann were then a p p l i e d t o two of h i s b e t t e r known p a i n t i n g s , "Effervescence" and " F a n t a s i a . " The f i n a l s e c t i o n of Hofmann's monograph are then discussed i n r e l a t i o n t o q u a l i t y i n a work of a r t .

The idea of "the s i g n i f i c a n c e of a work of a r t being determined by the q u a l i t y of i t s growth,"^ 7 r e f l e c t s the organic and o r g a n i s t i c q u a l i t y of h i s t h e o r i e s as published i n the p r e v i o u s l y c i t e d m a t e r i a l . The work of

6 7Hans Hofmann, Search f o r the Real, 1948, p. 46.

Page 41: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

34

art, u s u a l l y p a i n t i n g or s c u l p t u r e , i s the p h y s i c a l c a r r i e r of something beyond p h y s i c a l r e a l i t y , the s u r r e a l . I t i s the task of the a r t i s t who re c e i v e s the s u r r e a l f o r c e s to transpose these f o r c e s i n t o the p h y s i c a l c a r r i e r , the medium of expression. In t h i s way an a r t i s t ­i c c r e a t i o n i s "the metamorphosis of the e x t e r n a l p h y s i c a l aspects of a t h i n g i n t o a s e l f s u s t a i n i n g s p i r i t u a l

68

r e a l i t y . " This " s p i r i t u a l r e a l i t y " i s not organic i n the sense of possessing an a c t u a l l i f e organism but does have a l i f e created i n i t perceivable to the viewer. This l i f e i s i n c i t e d by the a r t i s t ' s placement of form and c o l o r i n such a way as t o create the e f f e c t of move­ment and v i t a l i t y . "Movement does not e x i s t without l i f e .

69

Movement i s the expression of l i f e . " The c r e a t i o n of s p i r i t u a l r e a l i t y depends on

"metaphysical perceptions, the search f o r the e s s e n t i a l 7 0

nature of r e a l i t y . " One cannot simply change a p h y s i c a l e n t i t y i n t o the realm of the s p i r i t u a l by mere placement. A fragment of thought i n i t s e l f i s meaningless u n t i l other fragments are r e l a t e d so as to form an i d e a . In the same 68 T

Loc. c i t . 69

7Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " 1932, p. 38. 7 0 Hofmann, Search f o r the Rea l , 1948, p. 46.

Page 42: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

way p h y s i c a l e n t i t i e s can be made meaningful by r e l a t i o n ­ships t o other e n t i t i e s . The a c t u a l p h y s i c a l character­i s t i c s of a medium of expression d i f f e r e n t i a t e the various a r t s f o r "a p l a s t i c idea must be expressed with p l a s t i c means j u s t as a musical idea i s expressed w i t h musical

71

means, or a l i t e r a r y idea w i t h v e r b a l means."' In each case the expression of the idea i s achieved by p l a c i n g two e n t i t i e s i n an emotionally c o n t r o l l e d s i t u a t i o n which creates a t h i r d e n t i t y of higher order. This higher order i s s p i r i t u a l , a c r e a t i o n of the mind under those s p e c i a l circumstances. In such a r e l a t i o n there i s mutual r e ­f l e c t i o n ; each e n t i t y a f f e c t s the other and v i c e versa. The l i m i t s f o r the r e l a t i o n s i n p a i n t i n g i s determined by the extent of the canvas or the piece of paper.

Any act done t o the canvas n a t u r a l l y creates a c o n t r a c t i o n of the surface area but a l s o that act i s always answered back i n the opposite d i r e c t i o n . In t h i s way the canvas appears t o " c o n t r a c t and t o expand i n simultaneous e x i s t e n c e , a c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of s p a c e . " 7 2

The p i c t u r e plane appears t o have depth and space. This space i s not n a t u r a l i s t i c f o r th a t i s a " s p e c i a l case, a p o r t i o n of what i s f e l t about three dimensional experience.

Loc. c i t .

Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p.48.

Page 43: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

36 This expression of the a r t i s t ' s experience i s thus

73 incomplete." The depth and space that appears on the p i c t u r e surface does not destroy i t s two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y f o r " i t i s the conceptual completeness of a p l a s t i c experience ( p l a s t i c c r e a t i o n without d e s t r o y i n g a f l a t surface) that warrants the p r e s e r v a t i o n of the

71 two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y . "

The depth that i s created i s not achieved by the pers p e c t i v e system of the Renaissance p a i n t e r s but r a t h e r "by the c r e a t i o n of f o r c e s i n the sense of 'Push and Pull'. , ?75 "Since one cannot create ' r e a l depth' by c a r v i n g a hole i n the p i c t u r e , and since one should not attempt t o create the i l l u s i o n of depth by t o n a l grada­t i o n , depth as a p l a s t i c r e a l i t y must be two dimensional i n a formal sense as w e l l as i n the sense of c o l o r . " In t h i s statement, Hofmann r e v e a l s that p a i n t i n g t o him e n t a i l s both form and c o l o r , whereas i n the 1932 a r t i c l e he st a t e d that a r t v i t a l i z e d form.

"To create the phenomena of push and p u l l on a f l a t s u r f a c e , one has t o understand that by nature the p i c t u r e plane r e a c t s a u t o m a t i c a l l y i n the opposite

7 3 I b i d . , p.49.

7^Loc. c i t .

Loc. c i t . 7 6Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p.50.

Page 44: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

37 77 d i r e c t i o n of the stimulus r e c e i v e d . " When a square

area of c o l o r i s placed on the bare canvas an equal f o r c e i s d i r e c t e d o f f the canvas, perpendicular t o the canvas. Hofmann's statement, though s i m i l a r t o movement and counter-movement of 1932, defines the d i r e c t i o n more ex­p l i c i t l y and the a c t u a l r e s u l t s of an a p p l i c a t i o n of pai n t t o the p i c t u r e plane. When two areas are painted, a r e l a t i o n s h i p i s set up between them. Our eyes focus on each and on both causing one to become more accentuated and t h e r e f o r e p r o j e c t and the other to recede. When more than two areas are i n v o l v e d , the eye and the mind t r y t o solve the m u l t i p l e e n t i t i e s by p a i r i n g the areas t o create the s p i r i t u a l higher t h i r d . This higher t h i r d then can be f u r t h e r p a i r e d w i t h another area u n t i l the whole p a i n t i n g i s sti m u l a t e d by the a c t i o n of p a i r i n g and c r e a t ­i n g higher t h i r d s . In c r e a t i n g such t h i r d s , the canvas i s expanded and contracted. The two areas are u n i f i e d t o draw the edges of the canvas together or are separated t o a f f e c t an increase t o the surface area. "Push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n " can now be seen as being f o r c e s perpendicular to each other w i t h push and p u l l , p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o the p i c t u r e surface and expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n , p a r a l l e l t o the p i c t u r e s u r f a c e .

Loc. c i t .

Page 45: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

38 Push and p u l l can be e a s i l y created by mere planes

of d i f f e r e n t c o l o r s . Hofmann saw i n Cezanne's l a t e r works "an enormous sense of volume, b r e a t h i n g , p u l s a t i n g , expand­

ed i n g - c o n t r a c t i n g through h i s use of c o l o r . " Mood i s created as i s the a c t i o n of push and p u l l . The p r o j e c t i o n and r e c e s s i o n of c o l o r i s only a t t a i n e d i f the a r t i s t i s s e n s i t i v e to the c r e a t i o n of t h i s s u r r e a l e f f e c t . He does

7Q not use c o l o r alone, f o r p a i n t i n g i s "forming w i t h c o l o r . " ' 7

Color i s an i n t e g r a l part of form. This form i s based on the planar concept as the

Cubists had done. They recognized the value of the p i c t u r e plane's two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y as d i d the I m p r e s s i o n i s t s a l ­though the l a t t e r were r e a l l y "searching f o r the e n t i t y of

80 l i g h t , expressed through c o l o r . "

The use of form and c o l o r i s found i n the f i n e and a p p l i e d a r t s , the l a t t e r being commercial or decorative

81 as s t a t e d i n the 1931 a r t i c l e . The d i f f e r e n c e between the f i n e and a p p l i e d a r t s l i e s i n the way of regarding the medium of expression. The a p p l i e d a r t i s t arranges the p h y s i c a l expressive elements merely p l e a s i n g l y and t a s t e ­f u l l y . The f i n e a r t i s t "empathizes and f e e l s the i n t r i n s i c

78 Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p. 51.

7 < 7 L o c . c i t . Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p. 52. Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1932, p. 9-10.

Page 46: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

39

q u a l i t i e s of the medium of expression." Hofmann b e l i e v e d t h a t the concept of the union of the f i n e and a p p l i e d a r t s a t the Bauhaus to be a tragedy, f o r the f i n e a r t s "concern man's r e l a t i o n t o the world as a s p i r i t u a l being, " ^ 3

whereas a p p l i e d a r t s have merely a u t i l i t a r i a n purpose. "The d i s c o v e r i e s of the Bauhaus were mainly d i r e c t e d t o ­wards a v i t a l surface animation by a b s t r a c t design. " ^ The d e c o r a t i v e a r t i s t does not need to empathize, and the r e s u l t i s merely two dimensional. For a decorative a r t to become a f i n e a r t , t h a t work of a r t must possess "the phenomena of p l a s t i c movement ( f o r that) determines whether or not a work belongs i n the category of f i n e a r t s or i n

d r

the category of a p p l i e d a r t s . " J This l a s t statement de­f i n e s p e r f e c t l y how Hofmann d i f f e r e n t i a t e s between the two and shows the development of the concept of movement and v i t a l i t y i n the f i n e a r t s . In the e a r l i e r a r t i c l e s , a r t was t o have " v i t a l i z e d form,"movement. While s t i l l r e t a i n i n g t h i s concept, he has defined the l i m i t s of h i s movements, expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n , push and p u l l and how t o create them i n a t h e o r e t i c a l way.

g 2Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p . 5 2 . 8 3 I b i d . , p.53.

^ 4 L o c . c i t .

^ L o c . c i t .

Page 47: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

40 The a b i l i t y to create t h i s s p i r i t of movement i n

the work of a r t w i l l determine i t s q u a l i t y . Once t h i s v i t a l i t y i s achieved, the work of a r t l i v e s f o r e v e r . As s t a t e d i n the 1931 a r t i c l e , "that one i s immortal i n a r t who i s able t o pervade h i s work w i t h h i s s o u l and s p i r i t . " 0 The a r t i s t t r a n s f e r s the v i t a l i t y and energy of h i s i n s p i r e d s e l f t o the medium and t h i s energy r e t a i n s i t s momentum as long as the work remains i n the same p h y s i c a l s t a t e . "The r e a l i n a r t never d i e s because i t s

87 nature i s predominantly s p i r i t u a l . " ' Hofmann b e l i e v e s t h a t i f one i s able to v i t a l i z e a p a i n t i n g u n t i l i t be­comes s p i r i t u a l , the a r t i s t w i l l become immortal f o r the s p i r i t u a l i s d e r i v e d from the a r t i s t and h i s experience.

While the "Search f o r the Real" i s only a p o r t i o n of the monograph, the r e s t of the book i s devoted t o a p r e v i o u s l y published and discussed a r t i c l e , " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " 0 0 and "Excerpts from the Teaching of Hans Hofmann." This l a s t a r t i c l e i s a l s o mainly derived from the p r e v i o u s l y discussed m a t e r i a l but new elements can be found.

In the s e c t i o n d e a l i n g w i t h the l i n e and the plane, he says that "the p i c t o r i a l s t r u c t u r e i s based on the plane concept. The l i n e o r i g i n a t e s i n the meeting of two

°~6Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1932, p. 11. °*7Hofmann, 'Search f o r the Re a l , 1948, p. 54. °"°*Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " 193.1-,p. 5-7.

Page 48: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

41 p l a n e s . n ^ In h i s a r t i c l e , " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n " of 1932, he s a i d that "the l i n e was a f u r t h e r development of the

probably due t o the i n c r e a s i n g awareness of the use of planes i n r e l a t i o n to c o l o r . Works of t h i s p e r i o d , 1940 t o 1950, show l e s s use of l i n e to f u r t h e r d e f i n e planes. In " F a n t a s i a , " 1943, and "Effervescence," 1944, l i n e g r a d u a l l y l o s e s i t s purpose as a d e f i n i n g s t r u c t u r e . The white d r i b b l e of p a i n t i n " F a n t a s i a " ( p l a t e I) over­l a y s areas of h e a v i l y pigmented su r f a c e s . The l i n e , as s t a t e d i n the 1932 a r t i c l e , i s the smallest p a i n t i n g plane. The s p i r a l and c a l l i g r a p h i c designs of paint d r i p p r o j e c t from i t s b e a u t i f u l l y mottled y e l l o w , green, mauve and blue background. In the lower l e f t hand corner there i s s t i l l the t r a c e of the l i n e as a method of d e f i n i t i o n . The sideways " C " - l i k e formation painted i n b l u e - b l a c k , i s defined by a white dripped l i n e . The white sharpens the edge of the black against the mauvish receding area. A c a v e r n - l i k e formation i s created by the white d e f i n i t i o n . This small area c o n t r a s t s w i t h h i s t h e o r i e s of expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n and push and p u l l . For here a n a t u r a l i s t i c hole i s created on the surface of the canvas as Renaissance p a i n t e r s had done. The contrast of the " C " - l i k e shape and

p l a n e — t h e smallest p a i n t i n g plane. TT 90 The change i s

89 Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, P»70. Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " 1932, p.37. 90

Page 49: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

42

the dark downward d i r e c t i o n a l device i n the center lead

the eye to the base of the canvas. Hofmann manages to

excape from the hole-in-the-wall e f f e c t by placing a small

area of the same blue-black and an area of green to the

l e f t center. The eye i s taken i n a r ,U"-like route and

gradually lead into areas of increased color i n t e n s i t y .

A t r a n s i t i o n a l passage can be seen i n the upper l e f t hand

corner green area where the green of the l e f t center has-

been combined with the yellow of the upper area. The eye

i s caught by the brightness of the upper yellow area and

directed down to the lower l e f t hand corner. Black and

green areas work the eye up to the t r a n s i t i o n a l green area

and the eye cycle begins again. The movement of the eye

i s not continuously r o t a t i n g , for the dripped l i n e a r white

areas detract the eye i n an o s c i l a t i n g motion p a r a l l e l to

the picture plane. This p a r a l l e l o s c i l l a t i o n i s what

Hofmann meant by contracting and expanding forces. A

sim i l a r motion i s also set up perpendicular to the

picture plane. The alternating projection and recession

from the canvas of the yellow and white drip areas i s what

Hofmann meant by push and p u l l . Push and p u l l and expansion

and contraction d i f f e r because t h e i r d i r e c t i o n of forces

are perpendicular -to each other.

The multi-directions of the forces set up tension.

The expanding and projecting forces of the yellow i s

Page 50: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

43

contrasted and balanced i n a dynamic e q u i l i b r i u m by the more sombre and heavy lower areas. The overlays of white d r i p t i e the composition together and a l s o create a l i v e ­l i n e s s of movement and d i r e c t i o n . The d r i p areas then, are used f o r both t h e i r l i n e a r and planar q u a l i t i e s .

In "Effervescence", 1944, ( p l a t e I I ) there i s an absence of the l i n e a r elements. Each has been set or dripped as a planar u n i t . Lines created are the meeting of two planes of c o l o r . In the upper l e f t hand corner, the mauve i s blended over the green to hide the a c t u a l edges. Even the t h i n d r i p l i n e s i n the p a i n t i n g are not l i n e a r f o r they are placed against a c o n t r a s t i n g back­ground i n order f o r them t o p r o j e c t . In the lower l e f t hand corner, the black d r i p oozing from the c e n t r a l area c o n t r a s t s w i t h i t s red background. Though almost l i n e a r , the red on the yel l o w background o v e r l a i d w i t h the black d r i p undulates and creates a push and p u l l e f f e c t . I f the ye l l o w p r o j e c t s , the red recedes and the eye does not focus on the black d r i p . I f the red p r o j e c t s , the black p r o j e c t s f u r t h e r - i t i s the focus - and the y e l l o w recedes.

This whole composition i s b a s i c a l l y formed by the a l t e r a t i o n of focus t o create a v i t a l p a i n t i n g . The p a i n t ­i n g i s composed semi-symmetrically w i t h a d i a g o n a l c r o s s i n g from the upper r i g h t t o the lower l e f t . The design on e i t h e r side of the s o - c a l l e d diagonal are not exact but

Page 51: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

44 s i m i l a r shapes are represented i n the c o n t r a s t i n g c o l o r i n an obvious design f o r balance. The large c e n t r a l white mass w i t h i t s two h o r n - l i k e d r i p p i n g s i s r e f l e c t e d i n a s i m i l a r black area t o the r i g h t . As was sta t e d e a r l i e r , the shapes are not e x a c t l y a l i k e f o r there i s a l s o a conscious attempt t o achieve a dynamic e q u i l i b r i u m . The l a r g e c e n t r a l black area at the top of the canvas bears l i t t l e resemblance t o the white area of the bottom center. Here one can see tha t Hofmann has taken i n t o account the a t t r a c t i o n to the top black area and the ba s i c l e f t - r i g h t d i r e c t i o n of the base caused by the b r i g h t y e l l o w . The l a r g e black area can be followed through t o form a v e r t i c a l black blob. This appearance causes a h o r i z o n t a l and v e r t i c a l e f f e c t . I f the eye s h i f t s s l i g h t l y t o the top from the bottom, a d i f f e r e n t focus i s a t t a i n e d and the upper black blob expands o f f the canvas as does the yellow-white bottom area.

The y e l l o w and mauve areas around the corners create movement i n the push and p u l l realm. At once the y e l l o w p r o j e c t s and the mauve recedes and v i c e versa. The motion i s not v i b r a n t or e l s e the eye would be shaken o f f the canvas. The area of green t o the upper l e f t balances the b l a c k e r area of r i g h t center. A c t u a l l y the mass of the green a t t r a c t s the eye to the mauve because the contrast i s so subtle and not b l a t a n t as i n the y e l l o w and black area. By means of the c o l o r planes

Page 52: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

., . 45

o r i e n t e d to the d i r e c t i o n of force and t o balance, the 91

dynamic e q u i l i b r i u m of "Effervescence" i s achieved. The t o t a l e f f e c t created i n these p a i n t i n g s i s

"a deep a r t i s t i c expression, the product of a conscious f e e l i n g f o r r e a l i t y . This concerns both r e a l i t y of nature and the r e a l i t y of the i n t r i n s i c l i f e of the medium of e x p r e s s i o n . " 9 2 Consciousness i s the main f a c t o r t h a t d i f f e r e n t i a t e s the work of an a r t i s t and the work of a c h i l d . Undoubtedly the work of Hans Hofmann and other A b s t r a c t E x p r e s s i o n i s t s have been compared t o the a r t of the ki n d e r g a r t e n . The a r t of a c h i l d i s f r e e from a l l conscious i n h i b i t i o n s . The work i s the express­i o n of the c h i l d ' s subconscious and h i s emotion. The work created by an adul t a r t i s t i s s i g n i f i c a n t i f there i s "a consciousness of experience as the work develops and i s emotionally enlarged through the greater command of the

93 expression medium. n" "The work of a r t goes through many phases of development but i n each phase i t i s always a

94 work of a r t . " The a d u l t i s able to c o n t r o l and use the medium of expression t o express what he wants whereas the

9 The student d i d not see enough of Hofmann's work t o f e e l q u a l i f i e d t o di s c u s s any more works, other than those seen by the student e i t h e r i n Toronto, New York, San F r a n c i s c o , Berkeley or Los Angeles.

9 2Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p.67. 93

Loc. c i t . 94 _

Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p.69.

Page 53: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

46 child lacks the technical control and manual dexterity.

The adult inclusion of the consciousness is dual in that

sense that i t is intellectual and spiritual. This spirit­

ual, derived from the unconscious, has been brought to

the conscious level and put under the control of the

intellect thereby making i t an aspect of the intellect.

The resulting "idea can only be materialized with the

help of a medium of expression, the inherent qualities

of which must surely be sensed and understood in order to 95

become the carrier of an idea."'^ "The work of art is finished from the point of

view of the artist when feeling and perception have re-96

suited in a spiritual synthesis."^ The medium of ex­

pression and the artist's translation of his "accumulation of experience gained from nature as the source of his

97 inspiration" y are combined to create the work of art; an

entity above either of its two basis, a higher third.

The artist has so fully expressed his idea that he himself

is self-satisfied.

The satisfaction that the observer feels is

aesthetic. "Aesthetic enjoyment is caused by the perception 9 5 I b i d . , p. 7 0 . 9^Hofmann, Search for the Real, 1948, p.69. 9 7 L o c . c i t .

Page 54: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

47 of hidden laws. The aim of a r t i s always to provide such joys f o r us i n every form of expression. The f a c u l t y t o enjoy r e s t s w i t h the observer."98 An idea transformed by the a r t i s t i n t o the medium of expression i s presented to the observer. What i s a t t a i n e d from the work s o l e l y de­pends on the observer.

Hofmann's t h i r d group of w r i t i n g s contains numerous short a r t i c l e s from e x h i b i t i o n s at the Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y and at the U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s ' E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American A r t . Also included are i n t e r v i e w s and published a r t i c l e s . In t h i s l a s t group of w r i t i n g s , the r o l e of c o l o r i n p a i n t i n g i s r e a l i z e d and the previous­l y c i t e d aspect of a work of a r t are f u r t h e r d e f i n e d . The w r i t i n g s have not been organized s t r i c t l y c h r o n o l o g i c a l l y but grouped according to subject and theory development.

In 1949, an i n t e r v i e w f o r A r t s and A r c h i t e c t u r e a appeared and i n 1951, an e x p l a n a t i o n f o r the U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American A r t . In both these a r t i c l e s , Hofmann r e p l i e d t o the question, what makes an A r t i s t ? and discussed the l i m i t a t i o n s of h i s senses and t h e i r e f f e c t on h i s perception of appearances.

Hofmann r e a l i z e d t h a t when the a r t i s t i s able t o a f f e c t the observer because the a r t i s t has an inherent q u a l i t y w i t h i n h i m s e l f . I t has not been l e a r n t but was

Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p.74.

Page 55: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

48

i n b o r n . The a r t i s t has a " c r e a t i v e i n s t i n c t , a searching oo

mind and the highest e x h a l t a t i o n of the s o u l . " 7 7

With these t r a i t s he i s able t o "transpose the deepest and w e i g h t i e s t experience i n t o a new dimension of the s p i r i t . " - 1 " 0 0 The work of a r t he creates i s a new r e a l i t y , and a l s o r e f l e c t s "the whole behaviour of the man ( a r t i s t ) , e t h i c a l c o n v i c t i o n s , and h i s awareness of c r e a t i v e

101 r e s p o n s i b i l i t i e s . " Hofmann f e l t t h a t the humanistic

102 q u a l i t y of P a r i s allowed f o r h i s freedom of development. I n that atmosphere he could create w i t h "a f r e e and u n i v e r s a l i n t e r w o r k i n g of a l l contemporaries w i t h constant

103

reference to what he r e c e i v e d and l e a r n t from the past." J

Although he held a reverence f o r the past the only v a l i d use, i n h i s o p i n i o n , of the past was the d e p i c t i o n of h i s own v i s i o n .

What the a r t i s t sees around him has been a f f e c t e d by one's past experience. One has " d e f i n i t e ideas about the object i n s p i t e of the f a c t that the object may or

9 % a n s Hofmann, "Reply to Questionaire and Comments on a Recent E x h i b i t i o n , " A r t s and A r c h i t e c t u r e , v o l . 66, no. 11, Nov., 1949, p. 27.

100 T .. Loc. c i t . 1 0 1Hofmann, "Reply to Questionaire ...," 1949, p. 45. 102- . -Loc. c i t . 1 0 3Hofmann, "Reply t o Questionaire ...," 1949, p. 46.

Page 56: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

104

may not have m u l t i - s u b o r d i n a t e p a r t s . " We see an o b j e c t at d i f f e r e n t times from d i f f e r e n t viewpoints and

these f a c t s are a l l used i n the p e r c e p t i o n of t h a t o b j e c t

at a l a t e r date. " A l l p a r t s t o g e t h e r are summarized i n

the i d e a of the o b j e c t and the idea of the category t o 105

which the obj e c t belongs." As Hofmann s a i d i n a l a t e r

a r t i c l e , "When I p a i n t a sunset, I p a i n t a thousand sun-

s e t s of which I was a p a r t . " H i s accumulation of

past experience i s brought f o r t h when he wishes t o use

i t . When brought t o the consciousness, t h i s accumulation

too o f t e n can be d e t r i m e n t a l i n t h a t one may "act as s l a v e s t o h a b i t , u nfree and automatic, l i k e i n a mental

10?

p r i s o n . " Hofmann b e l i e v e s t h a t accumulated thought

should be i n c o r p o r a t e d but should not r u l e the order of

thought and c r e a t i o n . The a r t i s t s mind should be f r e e

t o experience nature c o n t i n u a l l y and s t i l l be able t o

r e c e i v e a new s e n s a t i o n from i t each time. 104

Hans Hofmann, " ," c i t e d i n U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American P a i n t i n g , March 4 - A p r i l 1, 1951, Urbana, U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 19517 p. 1877~"

105 T , Loc. c i t .

Hans Hofmann, " ," c i t e d i n U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American P a i n t i n g , March 7 - A p r i l 7, 1963, Urbana, U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 1963, p. 86.

107 Hans Hofmann, U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n

..., 1951, p. 187.

Page 57: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

50 In a 1951 catalogue f o r h i s annual show at the

Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , Hofmann published h i s a r t i c l e , "Space P i c t o r i a l l y R e a l i z e d Through the I n t r i n s i c F a c u l t y of Colors t o Express Volume." Dealing mainly w i t h c o l o r , he explained the p r o p e r t i e s of pure c o l o r and t h e i r e f f e c t on the a r t i s t and the observer. Unbroken pure c o l o r can be used by the a r t i s t without any d i s t u r b i n g e f f e c t s I f he t r a n s l a t e s a s p a t i a l experience of nature or the automatic response of the p i c t u r e plane i n t o a p l a s t i c statement and

108 places i t on the p i c t u r e s u r f a c e . In t h i s way, c o l o r from the s t a r t i s a formal problem which must be taken i n t o account as the other formal elements must. This statement i s a f u r t h e r development to the s o l u t i o n of the formal and c r e a t i v e elements. In 1931, the formal elements were the l i n e , the plane, volumes and the r e s u l t i n g complexes. His l a t e r l i s t of c r e a t i v e elements i n c l u d e d a l l the formal elements w i t h the a d d i t i o n of c o l o r and l i g h t . His s t a t e ­ment of 1951 makes c o l o r and l i g h t a formal problem and part of the formal elements. In f a c t , formal and c r e a t i v e elements have become one.

In c r e a t i n g the work of a r t , pure c o l o r should be used. Pure c o l o r can be "any mixture of c o l o r as long as

1 n e t

x u o H a n s Hofmann, "Space P i c t o r i a l l y R e a l i z e d through the I n t r i n s i c F a c u l t y of.Colors t o Express Volume,"cited i n Hans Hofmann E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue, Nov. 13 - Dec. 1, New York, Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , 1951.

Page 58: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

51 such a mixture i s handled f l a t and unbroken. The t o t a l i t y of i t s formal extension a f f e c t s only one c o l o r

shade and w i t h i t one l i g h t m e a n i n g . W h e n t h i s area

of pure c o l o r i s juxtaposed onto another pure c o l o r area, "each c o l o r becomes t r a n s l u c e n t by depth p e n e t r a t i o n s , and w i t h i t , volume of v a r i e d degrees."'1""'"0 The volume created i s p r o p o r t i o n a l t o the depth r e q u i r e d t o b r i n g the canvas back t o two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y and on i t s placement on the canvas, both which are i n t e r r e l a t e d . "Any c o l o r shade must be i n the volume th a t i t suggested, the exact p l a s t i c e quivalent of i t s formal placement w i t h i n the

111 composition." From t h i s i t can be seen t h a t each c o l o r shade must be so placed i n the composition t h a t i t r e f l e c t s the volume th a t i s to be depicted i n t h a t area. Small c o l o r areas should not be used f o r they would be blended by perception and be seen as a black and white f u n c t i o n , t o n a l . By using l a r g e r areas of separated c o l o r s , t h i s i n t e r v a l f a c i l i t y makes c o l o r a p l a s t i c means. The c o n t r a s t s between the c o l o r s w i l l create a l i v e l y and v i b r a n t volume suggestion.

Also by the contrast of c o l o r s , a mystic express­i o n i s created. Contrasts are handled not haphazardly,

1 0 9 L o c . c i t 110T ' c i t Loc. c i t I l l

Loc. c i t

Page 59: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

52

but "only i n r e l a t i o n t o a s t r i c t mastery of the c o l o r s w i t h the composition through the placement of the c o l o r s . " H 2 Depending on placement, c o l o r and c o n t r a s t s , the i n t e r - r e l a t i o n s h i p between these q u a l i t i e s creates a p s y c h o l o g i c a l e f f e c t . Therefore, i f the composition i s a l t e r e d s l i g h t l y a new p s y c h o l o g i c a l rapport w i l l

113 develop. "This e x p l a i n s the magic of p a i n t i n g . "

During 1952 two a r t i c l e s were published i n e x h i b i t i o n catalogues. As w i l l be seen i n the f o l l o w i n g paragraphs t h e i r contents overlap. The f i n e and a p p l i e d a r t s are d i s t i n g u i s h e d by t h e i r d i f f e r e n t approaches, empathy being the d i f f e r e n t i a t i o n between the two. Creat­ions dependence on experience w i l l i n the end determine what work of a r t can and w i l l represent. In c r e a t i n g such a work of a r t , Hofmann would employ h i s dual c a p a c i t y of e x p e r i e n c i n g . The f i r s t i s h i s r e a c t i o n t o time and the m a t e r i a l world around him. The second i s that which makes him an a r t i s t , " p r o f e s s i o n a l consciousness." What t h i s q u a l i t y a c t u a l l y i s , Hofmann d i d not c l e a r l y d e f i n e . I t e n t a i l s " a l l the b a s i c requirements of h i s p r o f e s s i o n which makes p i c t o r i a l r e a l i z a t i o n of a l l the other r e -

Loc. c i t . 113

Loc. c i t .

Page 60: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

53 quirements p o s s i b l e . " 1 1 4 In each experience there i s

the presence of empathy, "the capacity of f i n d i n g and

givi n g of i n t r i n s i c values of the things i n l i f e as well 115

as an a r t i s t i c r e a l i z a t i o n . " J The a r t i s t must be able

to transpose himself into animate and inanimate objects.

It i s necessary f o r the act of creation.

Creation i s based on an i n i t i a t i n g concept which

i s derived from the experience of the world around,

nature. Hofmann had made a similar statement i n the

1915 Prospectus. To experience deeply requires the power

of empathy. Once a concept i s formed i t goes through a

series of changes when the a r t i s t i s transposing i t into

the physical e n t i t y of the medium. He must take into

account the q u a l i t i e s of the medium by empathizing into

i t . "The execution of the concept asks from the a r t i s t

the penetration of the inner l i f e of the medium of ex-

pression."

The work of art created i s a new Reality for i t

has a s o l i t a r y existence. It represents the personality

of the a r t i s t , his soul, mind, s e n s i b i l i t y and temperment,

**Hans Hofmann, " ," cited i n University of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American Painting, March 2 - A p r i l 15, 1962, University of I l l i n o i s , Urbana, 1952, p.199.

1 1 ^ L o c . c i t . 116

Hofmann, University of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n. . . , 1952, p.200. — ~~~

Page 61: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

54 I t i s the " g l o r i f i c a t i o n of the human s p i r i t , " f o r i t holds that s p i r i t i n a state of e t e r n a l r e j u v e n a t i o n i n answer t o an everchanging world. By h o l d i n g the s p i r i t of the a r t i s t , he becomes immortal. Art i s a l s o a " c u l t u r a l documentation of the time i n which i t was pro-

117 duced." (Harold Rosenberg has sta t e d that "Hofmann

118 separated a r t from s o c i a l c o n f l i c t " during the middle t h i r t i e s . ) "Modern a r t i s a symbol of our democracy the a r t i s t through h i s a r t i s the p e r s o n i f i c a t i o n of democracy's fundamental p r i n c i p l e i n being the higher ex­ample of s p i r i t u a l freedom i n h i s performance of uncon-

119 d i t i o n a l , u n r e s t r i c t e d c r e a t i v e n e s s . " Because of the burdensomeness of everyday l i f e i n a democratic or other s o c i e t y , a r t i s a counter-balance t o i t .

The r e l e a s e achieved from a r t can be a t t a i n e d i n both the f i n e and the a p p l i e d a r t s . The d i f f e r e n c e be­tween the f i n e and the a p p l i e d a r t s i s the E q u a l i t y

12D through which the image becomes s e l f - e v i d e n t . " There i s no b a s i c d i f f e r e n c e between t h i s d e f i n i t i o n and e a r l i e r ones d e a l i n g w i t h symphonic and decorative p a i n t i n g . Fine 117

Hans Hofmann, "A Statement by Hans Hofmann," c i t e d i n Hans Hofmann E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue, Oct. 26 --Nov. 22, New York, Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , 1952.

118 Harold Rosenberg, "Hans Hofmann's L i f e C l a s s , "

P o r t f o l i o and A r t News Annual., no. 6, Autumn, 1962, p. 25. 119

Hofmann, "Reply t o qu e s t i o n a i r e ...," 1949, p. 45. 120

Hofmann, "A Statement ...," 1952.

Page 62: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

55 a r t s or symphonic p a i n t i n g i s "the end product of an i n ­tense accumulation of i n t r i n s i c values which have pre­conditioned each other a e s t h e t i c a l l y i n a step-by-step development to summarize f i n a l l y i n the c r e a t i o n of t h i s a l l dominant s i n g u l a r , luminous and t r a n s l u c e n t volume t h a t makes the s p a t i a l t o t a l i t y and monumentality of the p i c t u r e . " The f l a t n e s s of the decorative a r t s i s d e r i v e d from the constant p i c t o r i a l balance which "depends on the formal placement of the c o l o r s w i t h i n the composit­i o n and c r e a t i o n of v a r i e d i n t e r v a l s that makes: c o l o r a p l a s t i c means of f i r s t o r d e r . " 1 2 2 In both, Hofmann has placed a greater emphasis on l i g h t and c o l o r . The length of the d e f i n i t i o n s e x h i b i t s Hofmann's wordy s t y l e of w r i t i n g but most imp o r t a n t l y , shows the i n c l u s i v e n e s s and development of ,his t h e o r i e s up t o t h i s date.

The a r t i c l e s j u s t c i t e d , as has been seen, are s t r a i g h t forward and do not a p p r e c i a b l y change or add t o Hofmann's theory. In J u l y of 1953, he published in New Venture h i s a r t i c l e "The R e s u r r e c t i o n of the P l a s t i c A r t s . " I t f u r t h e r d e f i n e d Hofmann's stand f o r movement on the p i c t u r e plane. As Hofmann s a i d , the R e s u r r e c t i o n of the

1 2 1 T

Loc. c i t . 122 L o c . . c i t .

Page 63: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

56 P l a s t i c A r t s was the "rediscovery of the L i f e endowed

p i c t u r e s u r f a c e . " 1 2 3 The p i c t u r e surface a u t o m a t i c a l l y

responds t o "any p l a s t i c animation with an a e s t h e t i c e q u i v a l e n t i n the opposite d i r e c t i o n of the re c e i v e d i m p u l s e s . " 1 2 4 When an area of paint i s a p p l i e d to the canvas, a p r o p o r t i o n a l area and f o r c e pushes away from the canvas towards the observer. The d i f f e r e n c e between the pushing i n t o and p u l l i n g out of creates a f e e l i n g of depth and space. "The e n t i r e depth problem i n the v i s u a l a r t s culminates i n t h i s way i n an emotionally c o n t r o l l e d a e s t h e t i c p r o j e c t i o n i n t o the hidden laws of the p i c t u r e

12 5 s u r f a c e . " J When one perceives as depth on a canvas painted w i t h knowledge of the p i c t o r i a l surface's hidden laws, one i s a c t u a l l y seeing the " s h i f t i n g " back and f o r t h of planes. The depth created has volume f o r i t i s negative space or form. The combination of both p o s i t i v e and negative space or form creates the whole e n t i t y of space.

In c r e a t i n g such an i l l u s o r y depth, one must take i n t o account formal placement ( l i n e , planes, volumes)

123 •^Hans Hofmann, "The Resu r r e c t i o n of the P l a s t i c

A r t s , " (1953). c i t e d i n Hans Hofmann, New York, Harry N. Abrams,-I963, p.44.

124T

Loc. c i t . 125 T

Loc. c i t .

Page 64: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

57 and c o l o r s a t u r a t i o n on the formal elements. One does not separate these two aspects but solves them simultaneously w i t h r e l a t i o n t o the s p a t i a l problem f o r the concept t o be d e p i c t e d . The a r t i s t i s able t o work these two by r e a l i z i n g that the p i c t o r i a l surface can be experienced i n a way s i m i l a r to that of nature. Nature i s i n a c t u a l i t y three dimensional but the appear­ance to our eyes i s two dimensional. Due to past l e a r n ­i n g and experience, the e f f e c t of the two dimensional appearance on our perception i s t h a t of three dimension­a l i t y . In a s i m i l a r way, the p i c t u r e surface i s two dimensional but because of the combined e f f e c t of p l a c e ­ment and c o l o r s a t u r a t i o n , the p i c t u r e surface has the e f f e c t of three d i m e n s i o n a l i t y . Hofmann r e t a i n e d the theory of e f f e c t and appearances as stated i n the 1932 a r t i c l e , " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n . " The i l l u s o r y p i c t o r i a l space a l t e r n a t e s between two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y and three d i m e n s i o n a l i t y c r e a t i n g the push and p u l l e f f e c t . The

p i c t o r i a l space i s "an a e s t h e t i c a l l y created space, (and) an a c t i v a t e d f l u c t u a t i n g space balanced w i t h i n the periphery of the inherent laws of the p i c t u r e surface i n r e l a t i o n t o which a l l employed p i c t o r i a l means must f u n c t i o n p l a s t i c a l l y . " 1 2 6 The p i c t u r e plane has a d e f i n i t e l i m i t t o which p r o j e c t i o n and r e c e s s i o n can occur.

126_ Loc. c i t .

Page 65: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

58 The amount depends on the surface's s i z e , shape, ground and the a r t i s t .

Hofmann himself has not defined and explained any one of h i s p a i n t i n g s i n r e l a t i o n t o these l i m i t s . In an a r t i c l e f o r the Bennington Alumni Quarterly he was asked t o do j u s t t h a t , but i n s t e a d he discussed h i s a t t i t u d e when p a i n t i n g . A p a i n t i n g to him "means the immense st r u g g l e through which the p i c t u r e has gone on i t s development to come to the r e s u l t which i s f i n a l l y o f f e r e d to the p u b l i c . E i t h e r h i s p i c t u r e s communicate or they communicate n o t . " 1 2 7 ^he

observer's message i s a p i c t u r e and that i t was "created as 128

nature has created a f l o w e r . " This could appear t o be a g o d - l i k e approach t o p a i n t i n g . Hofmann even i m p l i e s i t when he suggested i n an e a r l i e r a r t i c l e that a r t i s a means to i m m o r t a l i t y . Such may be the case but Hofmann i s t r y i n g undoubtedly t o show the s i m i l a r i t y of the growth f a c t o r of both p l a n t s and p a i n t i n g s . He sees the bare canvas as the seed, the a r t i s t ' s i n s p i r a t i o n as i t s source of l i f e , the c r e a t i v e elements such as l i n e , plane, volumes, complexes and c o l o r as the f e r t i l i z e r and nourishment f o r the seed

127 'Hans Hofmann, "Hofmann E x p l a i n i n g h i s P a i n t i n g s , "

Bennington College Alumnae Q u a r t e r l y , v o l . 7 , n o . l , Feb. 1, 1955, P.23.

128 T

Loc. c i t .

Page 66: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

59 and the completed p a i n t i n g as the culmination of the p l a n t , i t s f l o w e r .

Hofmann does not t r y to make you l i k e or d i s l i k e h i s completed p a i n t i n g s , p o s s i b l y one of the reasons why he does not e x p l a i n an i n d i v i d u a l p a i n t i n g . Each of h i s p a i n t i n g s , he b e l i e v e s , "has a l i f e of i t s own created by p i c t o r ­i a l means. I f they are not understood today, they are understood tomorrow, maybe i n a hundred years, maybe i n two hundred years. But I know they w i l l be understood." 1 29

I f Hofmann means h i s p a i n t i n g s w i l l be understood, he undoubtedly b e l i e v e s that h i s w r i t i n g s w i l l f a c i l i t a t e t h e i r understanding. As s t a t e d before, he does not di s c u s s h i s t h e o r i e s i n r e l a t i o n to any of h i s p a i n t i n g s . As i n h i s 1955 a r t i c l e "The Color Problem i n Pure P a i n t i n g , " a t h e o r e t i c a l d i s c u s s i o n i s undertaken. Color achieves prominence over form because of i t s a b i l i t y to form r e ­l a t i o n s and i n t e r v a l s . "Push and P u l l " can a l s o be achieved by c o l o r but c o l o r development depends on form f o r which the c o l o r s e x i s t ; so i t must develop simultan­eously.

Color can be used i n e i t h e r of two ways i n a p a i n t ­i n g . I f c o l o r i s used s o l e l y as a black and white f u n c t i o n f o r the c r e a t i o n of form and volume, i t i s a t o n a l p a i n t ­i n g . In another approach, pure p a i n t i n g , c o l o r i s used " f o r

129LOC. c i t

Page 67: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

60

a p l a s t i c and p s y c h o l o g i c a l p u r p o s e . " 1 3 0 Hofmann's use of the word p l a s t i c i n connection w i t h c o l o r shows h i s increas­ed awareness of c o l o r ' s volume forming q u a l i t y as stat e d i n "Space P i c t o r i a l l y R e a l i z e d through the I n t r i n s i c F a c u l t y of Color to Express Volumes," 1951. Pure p a i n t i n g i s a "rhythmic interweaving of the c o l o r scale, " x 3 1 which r e s u l t s i n simultaneous c o n t r a s t s . These c o n t r a s t s create the l i g h t i n a p a i n t i n g . Colors are.placed on the canvas so that they r e l a t e t o each other i n a " c o l o r development" upon which t h e i r formal grouping u l t i m a t e l y depends."132

Hofmann now says t h a t "formal and c o l o r development go on s i m u l t a n e o u s l y . " 1 ^ i n the e a r l i e r a r t i c l e s Hofmann d i f f e r ­e n t i a t e d between the two i n h i s d e f i n i t i o n of formal and c r e a t i v e e l e m e n t s . 1 ^ The simultaneousness of these two developments u n i t e the formal and c r e a t i v e elements i n t o one and the same category. In t h i s 1955 a r t i c l e he says

13 5 t h a t c o l o r ' s f u n c t i o n i s f o r m a l . Color i s t h e r e f o r e a

3 Hans Hofmann, "The Color Problem i n Pure P a i n t ­i n g , " (1955), c i t e d i n F r e d e r i c k S. Wight, Hans Hofmann, Ber k e l e y , U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a P r e s s , 1957, p.51

1 3 1 I b i d . , p.52. 1 3 2 I b l d . , p.54. 1 3 3 I b i d . , p.52. 1 3 4Hofmann, E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue Berkeley,

1931, Hofmann, " P l a s t i c Creation, 1? 1932, p. 35 - 38.

1 3 5Hofmann, "The Color Problem ...," (1955), p.54.

Page 68: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

61

f o r m a l and c r e a t i v e element, f u r t h e r u n i t i n g the two

i n d i s t i n g u i s h a b l e c a t e g o r i e s .

C o l o r , as used by i t s e l f , i s not c r e a t i v e . I t must

be used as an i n t e g r a l p a r t o f forms. "Color becomes

c r e a t i v e by f o r c e , by s e n s i n g the i n n e r l i f e by which

c o l o r s respond t o each other through the creat e d c r e a t ­

i v i t y of i n t e r v a l s . " 1 3 ^ These i n t e r v a l s are cr e a t e d by

two p h y s i c a l c a r r i e r s on the canvas which cause the eye t o

r e a c t t o each and t o both. These p h y s i c a l c a r r i e r s form

w i t h i n t he observer a n o n - p h y s i c a l e n t i t y which governs the

observer's v i s i o n of the two o b j e c t s . That n o n - p h y s i c a l

e n t i t y , " h y p e r p h y s i c a l o v e r t o n e , " 1 3 7 i s what Hofmann c a l l e d 138

i n p r e v i o u s a r t i c l e s a h i g h e r t h i r d , which was used i n

con n e c t i o n w i t h a r e l a t i v e meaning. I t can now be seen t h a t

an i n t e r v a l and a r e l a t i o n are r e l a t e d t o Hofmann*s terms. "Both are u n i t e d t o c a r r y a meaning through t h e i r i n t e r -

139

a c t i o n . " The v a r i a t i o n of f o r c e between the two hyper­

p h y s i c a l overtones i s the r e l a t i o n . T h i s r e l a t i o n i s a

"simultaneous a c c e l e r a t e d i n t e n s i f i c a t i o n or d i m i n u t i o n " 1 4 0

o f two c o l o r s i n an i n t e r v a l . An i n t e r v a l shows an i n t e r -1 3 6 I b i d . , p . 5 3 . 137

Loc. c i t . 1 od

Hofmann, Search f o r the Re a l , 1 9 4 8 " , p . 4 7 .

1 3 9Hofmann, "The Col o r Problem ...," ( 1 9 5 5 ) , p . 5 3 .

1 4 0 T

Loc. c i t .

Page 69: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

connectedness between two areas of c o l o r which can be j o i n e d t o form a higher t h i r d . The f o r c e between the c o l o r areas i s governed by the r e l a t i o n . Hofmann*s con­cept of an i n t e r v a l had changed from the 1931 a r t i c l e i n which he s a i d t h a t " i n t e r v a l s were c o l o r planes standing i n g r e a t e s t p o s s i b l e c o n t r a s t s t o i t s neighbours w i t h i n the balance of the whole."141 This idea leads t o the theory of expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n as discussed i n 1948 The d e f i n i t i o n of the i n t e r v a l of 1931 i s however able t o b r i n g a work of a r t together and u n i f y i t by the con­t r a s t c r e a t i n g a focus. The combination of the o v e r a l l c o n t r a s t s can create a l u m i n o s i t y on the canvas. As s t a t e d i n 1955, these i n t e r v a l s can a l s o operate between i n t e r v a l s themselves, " l i k e sound i n m u s i c . " 1 4 2 Because i n t e r v a l s amalgamate and grow, that "makes c o l o r a p l a s t means of f i r s t of o r d e r . " 1 4 3

From the p l a s t i c i t y which expands c o l o r monument-a l i t y and conversely c o n t r a c t s i t i n an c o u n t e r - a c t i o n , c o l o r can work w i t h the formal development of push and p u l l . Hofmann s a i d e a r l i e r that c o l o r i t s e l f p r o j e c t s and recedes much i n the same sense as "push and p u l l . " He now says that c o l o r combined w i t h the formal develop-

1 4 1Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1932,'p.9.

1 4 2Hofmann, "The Color Problem ...," (1955), p.53 143

Loc. c i t .

Page 70: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

63

ments of the work i s able t o increase or decrease the i n t e n s i t y of e i t h e r the push _or p u l l . I f one l a r g e area of red and a small area of y e l l o w were placed on a canvas, the l a r g e red area would p r o j e c t w i t h a stronger f o r c e than the y e l l o w . The "push" forward would a l s o be f a s t e r , as the red area catches the eye f i r s t . The eye focuses on the red area . f i r s t but i t a l s o sees the y e l l o w . By a l t e r i n g the focus to the yellow, the red would " p u l l " back and the yellow would push forward. This "push" of the y e l l o w i s not as strong as t h a t f o r the red f o r the y e l l o w as compared to the white ground does not c o n t r a s t as sharply and has not an area as l a r g e as the red. Depending on the d i s t a n c e of separa­t i o n between the two c o l o r s , there i s the i n t e r v a l f a c u l t y which v a r i e s the i n t e r a c t i o n between the two, a f f e c t i n g t h e i r expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n , push and p u l l . I f the colored areas were on a dark ground the suggestion of depth would be g r e a t e r . Black would tend t o recede c r e a t i n g a greater volume and a l s o a darker canvas w i t h l e s s l u m i n o s i t y .

I t i s the a b i l i t y t o synchronize the development of both c o l o r and form i n a p a i n t i n g which w i l l lead t o a s u c c e s s f u l work. In each case, they a f f e c t the p i c t u r e plane s i m i l a r l y i n t h a t there i s an automatic r e a c t i o n from the p i c t u r e plane whenever any of t h e i r

Page 71: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

64 developments occur on the p i c t u r e plane. I t must be r e a l i z e d that c o l o r development leads c o n t i n u a l l y t o ever-changing m u l t i - i n t e r p r e t a t i o n s . Through c o l o r ' s s e l f -

144 s u s t a i n i n g development, form i s determined. Because c o l o r e x i s t s on a form, such as a plane or volume, how and where the c o l o r i s placed on the canvas determines i n the end how the formal development w i l l occur. This a t t i t u d e of Hofmann has developed since h i s f i r s t w r i t ­ings when he s a i d that l i n e , plane and formal complexes

145 were the most important f a c t o r s f o r formal development. L a t e r i n a d i s c u s s i o n of formal and c r e a t i v e elements,

146 we see th a t form i s a r e s u l t of l i g h t and v i c e versa. Hofmann now has placed l i g h t and c o l o r as the determinants of form.

Color, because of i t s dual r o l e f o r i t s own develop­ment and formal development, creates the phenomena of push and p u l l which i s the b a s i s f o r p i c t o r i a l l i f e . Color by c o n t r a s t s w i t h neighbouring areas of c o l o r creates the v i b r a n t e f f e c t upon the v i s i o n of the eye f i r s t . The simultaneous contrast i s not t o n a l i n the sense that the c o l o r s merge together but t h a t " t h e i r meeting (to form c o n t r a s t s ) i s the consequence of the c o l o r and form

1 / f Z fHofmann, "The Color Problem ...," (1955), p.54. 1 4^Hofmann, E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue ...,Berkeley,1931. 146

Hofmann, " P l a s t i c C r e a t i o n , " 1932.

Page 72: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

65

development of the work. Form and c o l o r operate each 147

i n i t s own sovereign rhythm." The l a s t statement seems t o c o n t r a d i c t Hofmann's other statement i n the same a r t i c l e t h a t " c o l o r development determines, f o r m . " 1 ^ What Hofmann probably means i s t h a t although form i s determined by c o l o r placement, the placement of form has i t s own set of laws which i t must f o l l o w and obey. Both form and c o l o r a r e , however, governed by the P a i n t i n g Laws, s t a t e d i n "On the Aims of A r t , " 1952 .

The grouping of colored areas i n t h e i r formal development r e s u l t s i n a u n i t c a l l e d a complex. "In ^spite of a m u l t i p l i c i t y of shaded d i f f e r e n c e s , t h e i r s y n t h e s i s presents i t s e l f as one c o l o r complex c o n t r a s t ­ed w i t h another and a l l the other complexes w i t h i n the

149

p i c t o r i a l t o t a l i t y . " The i n t e r v a l l e d r e l a t i o n between the c o l o r s of that area react t o form a s o l i d p r o j e c t i n g and receding area. The r e l a t i o n s h i p between a l l the complexes w i t h t h e i r balance of push and p u l l , expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n presents the two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y of the canvas while the t e n s i o n a l f o r c e s create the depth and volume. I f one f o r c e i s greater than i t s counter-force i n the opposing d i r e c t i o n , the p a i n t i n g w i l l appear to

1 4 7Hofmann, "The Color Problem ...," ( 1 9 5 5 ) , p.54.

^" 4^Loc. c i t .

^"^Loc. c i t .

Page 73: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

have holes; areas of r e c e s s i o n i n which a p r o j e c t i o n i s not able to counteract i t . In a good p a i n t i n g t h i s i s not the case; the canvas i s a u n i f i e d whole.

Each complex i s made up of s e v e r a l areas of c o l o r but, "as a j e w e l , r e f l e c t s one c o l o r i n every change of

150 normal l i g h t c o n d i t i o n . " I t i s through "the i n t e r ­r e l a t i o n s h i p of the i n d i v i d u a l c o l o r s t o form one c o l o r r e f l e c t i o n and the t o t a l harmony between them (which) emanates the a s p i r e d c r e a t i v e intention."-*-51 j n

d e c o r a t i v e p a i n t i n g the largeness of the f l a t areas of co l o r does not permit such a close r e l a t i o n s h i p between the i n d i v i d u a l areas t o form groupings w i t h one l i g h t r e f l e c t i o n , but r a t h e r the large s i m p l i f i e d area i s a s i n g l e r e f l e c t i o n i n i t s e l f . The s i n g l e r e f l e c t i o n i s not as v i b r a n t and l i v e l y as the complexes of pure p a i n t i n g .

I t i s the l i f e of a pure p a i n t i n g t h a t allows f o r p i c t o r i a l communication. A new r e a l i t y comes i n t o e x i s t e n c e , a created r e a l i t y . The c o l o r gives a e s t h e t i c enjoyment and a sense of emotional r e l e a s e which i s r e l a t e d t o the form of the p a i n t i n g . When these f a c t s are taken i n t o account and "awaken i n us f e e l i n g s t o

1 5°Hofmann, "The Color Problem ...," (1955),p.56. 151 T ' ' Loc. c i t .

Page 74: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

67 which the medium of expression responds a n a l o g i c a l l y ,

152 we attempt t o r e a l i z e our experience c r e a t i v e l y . " The f i n i s h e d c r e a t i o n w i l l depend on the inter-meshing of a l l these ideas and l a c i n g them i n t o the p a i n t i n g . With the knowledge th a t the p a i n t i n g must f i t together the a r t i s t i s f r e e t o use h i s imagination, i n v e n t i v e n e s s , s e n s i b i l i t y and the s e l e c t i v e c a p a b i l i t y of h i s mind.

Man's mind and i t s e f f e c t from nature are d e a l t 153

w i t h i n Hofmann's 1958 p u b l i c a t i o n I t I s . The a f f e c t of nature and the a r t i s t ' s awareness w i l l determine the c r e a t i o n of the a r t i s t . The mind of the a r t i s t , surround­ed by nature, has a l s o been g r e a t l y i n f l u e n c e d by i t . He sees w i t h awareness, f o r "seeing without awareness, ( i s ) short of b l i n d n e s s . " 1 ^ Although there i s t h i s i n f l u e n c e , i t i s what the a r t i s t does w i t h these i n f l u e n c e s t h a t b r i n g s out a great work of a r t . "The i n t e r p r e t a t i o n of p i c t o r i a l means of what we see i s

15 5 'another a r t ' . " " O b j e c t i v i t y i s a l s o goose unless 1 5 2 L o c . c i t ,

153 Hans Hofmann, "excerpt from I t Is,"(Winter -

S p r i n g , 1959), c i t e d i n Los Angeles County Art Museum, New York School, The F i r s t Generation, Los Angeles, Members of the Board of the Los Angeles County A r t Museum, 1965, p.17.

" ^ 4 L o c . c i t . x

155 T ... ' Loc. c i t .

)

Page 75: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

68 156

we make something out of i t . " "Nature's purpose i n r e l a t i o n t o the v i s u a l a r t s i s t o provide the stimulus

stimulus through i t s c r e a t i v e behavior."157 Nature i n i t s c r e a t i v e way of b r i n g i n g l i f e t o the inanimate o b j e c t s , i n i t i a t e s i n the a r t i s t a s i m i l a r a c t i o n . The a r t i s t ' s mind i s s e n s i t i v e to the way i n which nature a c t s and r e f l e c t s t h i s i n h i s p a i n t i n g s . "Man's s e n s i t i v e mind can t h i n k and f e e l ; i t enables him to create t h a t i s t o impregnate p h y s i c a l substance w i t h

158

l i f e . " v By use of h i s conscious and unconscious f a c u l t i e s , the a r t i s t becomes aware of space i n every form of manifestation"159 of nature. Through the r e a l i z a ­t i o n t h a t the two dimensional surface of the p i c t u r e plane can be made to o s c i l l a t e t o the three dimensional, the r e s u l t i n g vibrancy and dynamism b r i n g s the l i f e t o the canvas. At each stage of the two dimensional and three dimensional there i s a s t a t i c s t a t e but the change t o the c o n t r a s t i n g dimension develops the sense of move­ment. Movement i s answered by a counter-movement and

156 y Hans Hofmann, "Nature and A r t , Controversy and

Misconception,", c i t e d in,New P a i n t i n g s by Hans Hofmann, Jan. 7 t o 2 5 , New York, K o o t z . G a l l e r y , 1958.

1 5 7 L o c . c i t . 158

Loc. c i t . 159'

Hofmann,"excerpt from I t I s , " 1959, p.17.

Page 76: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

69

consequently develops rhythm and counter-rhythm. The pushing and p u l l i n g t o both the two and three dimension­a l create the sense of f o r c e s which because of t h e i r balance brings about t e n s i o n s . These forces r e s u l t i n g from the p i c t u r e surface and the c o l o r and form t h a t have been a p p l i e d , have a l i f e of t h e i r own. "Color and l i g h t are t o a great extent subjected to the form problem

160 of the p i c t u r e s u r f a c e . " This statement c o n t r a d i c t s the 1955 a r t i c l e i n which Hofmann s a i d that c o l o r i s the b a s i s f o r form and that the two developments, formal and

.161 c o l o r , should be synchronized. Hofmann has appeared to back down on h i s stand f o r the predominance of the c o l o r development.

The l a s t s e r i e s of a r t i c l e s f o r the t h i r d group of Hofmann's published m a t e r i a l covers a period of four years and includes f i v e separate p u b l i c a t i o n s . These a r t i c l e s are g e n e r a l l y quite short and repeat Hofmann's p r e v i o u s l y stated t h e o r i e s . He stands f i r m on the non-f i g u r a t i v e philosophy which i n c l u d e s h i s t o t a l s e l f . The mood of the work then w i l l r epresent h i s t o t a l being. Hofmann's general philosophy of a r t takes on h i s summation of the ideas he has presented over the years. His

160 Loc. c i t .

l 6 lHofmann, "The Color Problem ...," (1955), p. 51-56.

Page 77: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

70 a t t i t u d e as a teacher i s not f o r g o t t e n f o r he has spent over h a l f h i s l i f e as one. Hofmann b e l i e v e s a teacher should not t e l l the student e x a c t l y which c o l o r or formal development p a t t e r n t o f o l l o w f o r i t i s the teacher's job to "approach (his) students merely w i t h the human d e s i r e t o f r e e them of a l l s c h o l a r l y i n h i b i t i o n s . " This f r e e ­dom w i l l e i t h e r b r i n g out that r e a l t a l e n t of a l l g i f t e d people or i t w i l l " k i l l a l l m e d i o c r i t y and f a l s e m y s t i ­f i c a t i o n of one's r e a l n a t u r e . " 1 ^ In the l a t t e r ease, Hofmann says he has done j u s t t h a t many times. He be­l i e v e s that t a l e n t e d people take time t o develop. They must pass through stages of s e l f - d i s c i p l i n e and s e l f -enlightenment i n order t o become masters. Hofmann has not v a r i e d h i s statement about an a r t i s t being born; t h i s inborn q u a l i t y must be l e d along a c e r t a i n path i n order t o achieve success.

His senses govern an inner eye or inner v i s i o n . The dependency of each sense on every other sense creates i n the mind combinations and r e l a t i o n s h i p s of great c r e a t i v e p o t e n t i a l and f a c i l i t a t e the imagination. Creat­ed r e l a t i o n s create a higher s p i r i t u a l t h i r d , and c r e a t i v e

l 6 2Hofmann, "excerpt from I t I s , " 1959, p.17. -i f.r>

Hans Hofmann, " ," c i t e d i n U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American P a i n t i n g , March 1 - A p r i l 5, 1959, U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , Urbana, 1959, p. 226. '

Page 78: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

7 1

combinations b r i n g about l i f e to the p i c t u r e surface by-push and pull,< expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n i n form and i n c o l o r . The medium i t s e l f i s only a c a r r i e r of the s i g n i f i c a n t meaning derived from the r e l a t i o n s and combinations which i s s p i r i t u a l , .hyperphysical. One can­not d i s c u s s or c r i t i c i z e a work of a r t on mere p h y s i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s alone f o r i t i s the s p i r i t u a l "which i s the only j u s t i f i c a t i o n o f a work of a r t . " x ^ 4 Hofmann had st a t e d e a r l i e r i n the 1948, The Search f o r the Re a l , "the r e a l i n a r t never die s because i t s nature i s predominantly s p i r i t u a l . " x ^ 5 p a i n t i n g — i s i n s p i r e d by the s p i r i t of i t s c r e a t i o n and i t s s t r a i g h t forward appeal to the

senses. The audience can i d e n t i f y the meaning and the mood of i t s c r e a t i o n . " The thoughts and a c t i o n s that are experienced i n c r e a t i n g that p a i n t i n g can be' seen by the observer.

Hofmann, when questioned, whether h i s p a i n t i n g s r e f l e c t h i s mood or emotion, r e p l i e d that they r e f l e c t h i s "whole psychic make-up and convey nothing but

167 my own nature." His involvement w i t h the p a i n t i n g

^Hans Hofmann, " ," c i t e d i n Hans Hofmann, E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue, Jan. 5- 23, I960, New York, Kootz G a l l e r y , I960. : :

l 6 5Hofmann, Search f o r the Re a l , 1948, p.54. l 6 6 j j 0 f m a n r L j E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue New York,I960, x^ 7Hans Hofmann, " ," c i t e d i n Katherine Kuh,

The A r t i s t ' s Voice, New York, Harper and Row, 1962,. p. 119.

Page 79: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

72

makes him f o r g e t h i s own personal problems and leads t o a c o n t i n u a l optimism. This mood i s r e f l e c t e d i n the l i g h t h e a r t e d t i t l e s which Hofmann says he chooses from the f e e l i n g the p a i n t i n g suggests when i t i s completed. This 1962 statement seems t o be a development from the one made i n 1955 i n the Bennington College Alumnae Qu a r t e r l y . He s a i d that he f e l t each p a i n t i n g meant an immense s t r u g g l e through which the p i c t u r e has gone through i n the development." 'HofmannTs change of a t t i t u d e r e f l e c t e d h i s growing p o p u l a r i t y and the great­er time he had f o r p a i n t i n g since he had closed h i s a r t scho o l .

The o p t i m i s t i c mood i s not a t t a i n e d as soon as one s t a r t s to p a i n t . Often Hofmann drew " i n order to fr e e himself so that he could understand the meaning of the c o m p o s i t i o n . " 1 ^ He becomes in v o l v e d with formal development and f i n a l l y engrosses himself i n the p a i n t ­i n g . He i s c o n t i n u a l l y aware of what i s happening on the canvas. A c c i d e n t s , planned or unplanned, are solved by the suggestion w i t h i n the work i t s e l f . No sketches are prepared f o r a p a i n t i n g , because each work of a r t i s developmental w i t h i n i t s e l f . At each stage, the p a i n t i n g or drawing i s a work of a r t .

l 6 oHofmann, "Hofmann Ex p l a i n s ...," 1955, p.23.

l 6^Hofmann, c i t e d i n The A r t i s t ' s Voice. 1962,p.125,

Page 80: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

73 The q u a l i t y of the work i s not dependent on

whether a r e a l image can be seen f o r a " f i g u r a t i v e attempt i s condemned when made without c o n s i d e r a t i o n of the u n d e r l y i n g a e s t h e t i c p r i n c i p l e of a b s t r a c t i o n s because such mortal negligence w i l l n e c e s s a r i l y lead t o u n i n s p i r e d i m i t a t i v e and academic f o r m a t i o n . " 1 7 0 The a r t i s t must l e t h i s mind be open t o a l l forms of c r e a t i o n so t h a t h i s thoughts w i l l be f r e e t o express a e s t h e t i c p r i n c i p l e s which-are the b a s i s of a r t . Hofmann does not e x p l a i n what i s meant by " a e s t h e t i c p r i n c i p l e s . " "No one can give a c o r r e c t explanation of what a r t i s . " 1 7 1 This l a s t statement appears t o be a c o n t r a d i c t i o n t o Hofmann's w r i t i n g s . Has he not t r i e d t o d e f i n e c r e a t i o n and the p r i n c i p l e s upon which i t i s based?

By a n a l y s i s of h i s own c r e a t i v e process, Hofmann developed h i s theory of c r e a t i v i t y . He r e a l i z e d t h a t a r t should not i m i t a t e p h y s i c a l l i f e f o r " a r t must have a l i f e of i t s own. A s p i r i t u a l l i f e . " 1 7 2 This idea of the n o n - f i g u r a t i v e and s p i r i t u a l q u a l i t y of a r t developed from h i s f i r s t w r i t i n g s . "A p a i n t e r must

1 7 0 H a n s Hofmann, " ," c i t e d i n U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American P a i n t i n g , Feb. 20 - A p r i l 2, 1961, U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , Urbana, 1961, p. 116.

1 7 1Hofmann, c i t e d i n The A r t i s t ' s Voice, 1962,p.118. 1 7 2 H a n s Hofmann. "Hans Hofmann on A r t . " The A r t

J o u r n a l , v o l . 22, no. j, Spring, 1963, p. 180.

Page 81: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

74 create p i c t o r i a l l i f e w i t h reference to the laws d i c t a t e d

173 by the medium.n , J Hofmann stated these laws a f t e r h i s a r r i v a l i n America i n 1931. Through the i n t u i t i v e f a c u l t y of h i s subconscious mind t o st i m u l a t e h i s conscious mind, the a r t i s t i s able t o use h i s senses so he can " d i s ­cover the i n t r i n s i c f a c u l t y and inner l i f e of e v e r y t h i n g . " 1 7 ^ He sta t e d i n 1931 that "the work of a r t i s the product of the a r t i s t ' s power f o r f e e l i n g and of h i s s e n s i t i v i t y t o l i f e - i n - n a t u r e and l i f e w i t h i n the l i m i t s of the medium."176 Hofmann's concept of empathy and s p i r i t u a l p r o j e c t i o n d i d not change through the years. The mind of the a r t i s t i s able to perceive beyond the purely p h y s i c a l . His inner eye sees i n t o the inner l i f e of everything; "therefore every-

" 177 t h i n g can serve as an expression medium." '' The q u a l i t y of the r e s u l t i n g work of a r t depends on the a r t i s t ' s a b i l i t y t o create a s p i r i t u a l r e a l i t y w i t h the p h y s i c a l medium of expression.

S p i r i t u a l i t y i s deri v e d from the "sy n t h e s i s of a l l 178

r e l a t i o n s h i p s . " As e a r l y as 1948, Hofmann had sta t e d l 73Hofmann, c i t e d i n The A r t i s t ' s Voice, 1962, p.118. ^Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1932, p. 9 - 10. 1 7 5Hofmann, "Hans Hofmann on A r t , " 1963, p.l&O. 1 7 6Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g and C u l t u r e , " 1931, p.6. 177 "Hofmann, "Hans Hofmann on A r t , " 1963, p. 180.

1 7 ^ L o c • c i t .

Page 82: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

75 t h a t "two p h y s i c a l f a c t s i n an emotionally c o n t r o l l e d r e l a t i o n s h i p always create the phenomenon of a t h i r d

179 f a c t of a higher order." 7 The s y n t h e s i z i n g of a l l r e l a t i o n s h i p s i s what Hofmann stated as " r e l a t i o n s under r e l a t i o n s being the highest form of a e s t h e t i c enjoyment," x o u Pleasure from such a work i s obtained by the perception of a u n i f i e d work of a r t . As i n an o r g a n i s t i c theory, a l l p a r t s are t i e d together and each part i m p l i e s another. The concept of p o s i t i v e and negative space i l l u s t r a t e s t h i s p o i n t . "Objects are

181 p o s i t i v e space" or form and empty space does not e x i s t f o r i t i s a negation of p o s i t i v e space or form. These two e n t i t i e s do not e x i s t s i n g u l a r l y f o r i n a t o t a l space, both e x i s t side by s i d e . To experience t h a t space i n a p a i n t i n g , one must f e e l the "f o r c e s and counter-forces that make a v i t a l f o r c e impelled dynamic

182 space," i . e . the opposing tensions of three dimension­a l and two dimensional. "Space i s a l l energy," f o r "space has volume and volume has mass." x^ 3 Hofmann's 1 7 9Hofmann, Search f o r the Re a l , 1949, p.47.

•) d o o uHans Hofmann, "The Mystery of Creative R e l a t i o n s , "

J u l y , 1953, c i t e d i n Hans Hofmann, New York, Harry N. Abrams, 19o3, p.45.

181 Hofmann, "Hans Hofmann on A r t , " 1963, p.182. l g 2 I b i d . , p.181. 1 5 3 I b i d . , p.182.

Page 83: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

7 6

s c i e n t i f i c p e r s o n a l i t y of h i s l a t e teens l e d him t o the t h e o r i e s of E i n s t e i n who s a i d , t h a t energy i s derived from mass, th e r e f o r e r e l a t i n g to space and energy. The knowledge of the inherent v i t a l f o r c e s of space and l i f e t h at these f o r c e s can cr e a t e , s t i r s the a r t i s t i c mind to greater imagination to create l i f e on the p i c t o r i a l s u rface f o r the viewer. " P i c t o r i a l l i f e i s based on t e n s i o n . Forces and counter-forces, rhythm and counter-rhythms." • Color i s one of the e a s i e s t and best means to create these f o r c e s f o r i t i s able to pro­duce depth ( p u l l ) and l i g h t emanation (push) rphe

f o r c e s of push and p u l l are mental i n that v i s u a l sensa­t i o n s are r e l a t e d t o past experience of tensions i n nature or th a t these tensions are f e l t as a r e a c t i o n from the p i c t u r e surface. Rhythm, a time and i n t e n s i t y element of "push and p u l l , " i s derived from the a r t i s t ' s temper-

• - 1 8 6 ament.

P a i n t i n g s of the per i o d a f t e r Hofmann's r e t r o s p e c t ­i v e at the Addison G a l l e r y of American Art f a l l i n t o three c a t e g o r i e s which r e f l e c t h i s t h e o r i e s at th a t time. "Magenta and Blue," ( 1 9 5 0 ) r e t a i n s Hofmann's " c u b i s t

1 8 4 T

Loc. c i t . 1 8 5

Loc. c i t . 1 8 6 Hofmann, "Hans Hofmann on A r t , " 1 9 6 3 , p. 1 8 0 .

Page 84: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

77 trauma." While the p a i n t i n g e a r l i e r c i t e d r e f l e c t s h i s

awareness of the p l a n a r concept, t h i s l a t e r work shows a

minimal p e r s i s t e n c e of the l i n e a r concept i n t e g r a t e d w i t h

the p l a n a r one as seen i n " F a n t a s i a " (1943). The f l a t

canvas of "Magenta and B l u e " ( p l a t e I I I ) has been broken

up i n t o f o u r quadrangles w i t h the lower ones l a r g e r . Red,

b l u e , y e l l o w , magenta and green have been used t o f u r t h e r

d i v i d e the quadrangles i n t o a semblance of a s p a t i a l area

d e p i c t i n g a s t i l l l i f e . The b r i g h t n e s s of the canvas r e ­

f l e c t s Hofmann's e a r l y c o n t a c t w i t h the F a u v i s t , Henri

M a t i s s e as i n h i s "Piano Lesson," (1916) . While the same

g e n e r a l l u m i n o s i t y of the canvas i s achieved by both,

M a t i s s e has used a more sombre red and a p a l e r and l e s s

v i b r a n t b l u e . Each c o l o r t h a t Hofmann has p l a c e d on the

canvas v i e s w i t h every other f o r the g r e a t e s t p r o j e c t i v e

and dynamic power. I f , as i n the case of the b l u e , an

a r e a of c o l o r does not match the dynamism of i t s neighbour­

i n g c o l o r to form a s t a b l e r e l a t i o n , t h a t area of c o l o r i s

i n c r e a s e d so t h a t the s i z e w i l l i n the end c r e a t e the same

e f f e c t . The magenta t o the r i g h t of the blue and on the

t o p l e f t corner of the canvas have a s m a l l area f o r t h e i r

p r o j e c t i v e powers do not n e c e s s i t a t e a l a r g e and dominant

area as does the b l u e . Even though they a r e at the s i d e of

Clement Greenberg, A r t and C u l t u r e , Boston, Beacon P r e s s , 1961, p. 192.

Page 85: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

the canvas, they have the force to combat the blue. The

use of color i n these planar areas i s further emphasized

in Hofmann's l a t e r works of I 9 6 0 , but l i n e s and dynamic

planes are used here to achieve the e f f e c t of "push and

pull," expansion and contraction.

As i n the a n a l y t i c a l cubist works of Picasso and

Braque, Hofmann has appeared to have taken d i f f e r e n t view

points of the same s t i l l l i f e . The blue area to the lowe:

r i g h t can be associated with the red, yellow and green

s t i l l l i f e area to the upper l e f t . While Braque and

Picasso took d i f f e r e n t views of the same object and t i e d

them together i n t h e i r compositions, Hofmann here, seems

to have taken a front and back view and separated them on

the canvas. It must be r e a l i z e d that these two areas

most l i k e l y do not represent the same objects from d i f f e r

ent sides but the relationships between t h e i r forms and

s p a t i a l displacement inherently cause the observer to

unify them. A r e l a t i o n i s set up between them which

causes the two areas to contract together yet the

i n t e n s i t y of the yellow-red texture and the magenta cause

the two to expand off the canvas.

The plane of blue i s projected off the canvas by

i t s f o r c e f u l color but most of a l l by the dynamic planes.

The blue area of color, by being angled, appears to come

out to the observer as the upper ri g h t yellow area recede

Page 86: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

79

This blue does not p r o j e c t f l a t out but i s a l s o angled f o r the lower black areas p r o j e c t s the blue when the lower p o r t i o n of the canvas comes i n t o focus. The whole bottom area i s a l s o angled o f f by the slanted h o r i z o n t a l . The red o v e r l a y i n g the blue and the red to the l e f t center cause the eye to f o l l o w a r i g h t - l e f t d i r e c t i o n and the c o n t r a s t i n g w i t h the yellow-green r e s u l t i n an a c t i v a t e d l i f t and push. The y e l l o w a s s o c i a t e s w i t h the yellow-red t e x t u r e t o b r i n g the plane down only to be projected again by the blue area. The y e l l o w area t o the upper r i g h t does not have the vigour or energy of the other quadrangles. In r e l a t i o n t o the oth e r s , i t appears u n f i n i s h e d , unsolved. The black and green l i n e a r d e f i n i t i o n of the planar object r a i s e d above i t l a c k form and s o l i d i t y as compared t o the objects placed above the blue .

The co n t r a s t between the f i n i s h e d , o v e r f i n i s h e d and u n f i n i s h e d aspects of the canvas i l l u s t r a t e s Hofmann's c u b i s t trauma. The overworked area to the upper l e f t shows Hofmann as a s y n t h e t i c c u b i s t w i t h the v i b r a n t t e x t u r e of red and ye l l o w . The l i n e a r q u a l i t y of the pineapple shape a t t a i n s only p a r t i a l planar concept i n the extreme r i g h t l e a f . By u s i n g the large area of c o l o r Hofmann has achieved the dynamism he c a l l e d f o r but i n d e p i c t i n g the smaller object the c o n t r a s t w i t h the l a r g e r areas only made them l i n e a r . The l i n e i s the smallest p a i n t i n g plane, but i n contrast t o a l a r g e planar area, i t becomes merely a l i n e .

Page 87: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

BO

However i n a work such as "Le G i l o t i n , " 1953, (p l a t e I V ) , the width of a p a i n t brush has been the b a s i c s i z e of the plane. Even the white area t o the upper r i g h t appears t o be subdivided i n t o three separate planes by the te x t u r e of the a c t u a l pigment. While the length of each plane v a r i e s , the width remains constant so tha t each brush stroke appears planar. Only seven l i n e s are used t o d e f i n e the f i g u r e but they are only superfluous: the f i g u r e could be seen without them. Hofmann's a b i l i t y t o use green i n a f r i v o l o u s mood d e t r a c t s from green's u s u a l sombre f e e l i n g . The paint has been a p p l i e d i n a r i c h creamy manner. The e f f e c t on the observer i s pure d e l i g h t . (This canvas now hangs i n the a d m i n i s t r a t i o n b u i l d i n g of the U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a at Berkeley. I t creates a l i v e l y and j o y f u l mood f o r the passer-bys and the working s t a f f . ) The l a v i s h amount of p h y s i c a l pigment and the h i g h l y t e x t u r e d surface creates a uniquely l i v e l y area of c o l o r which f o r e t e l l s the l a t e s t phase of Hofmann's p a i n t ­ings i n which he uses l u x u r i a n t o i l s i n re c t a n g u l a r plane of v i b r a n t c o l o r .

This e f f e c t can be seen i n "Above Deep Waters," 1959, ( p l a t e V). The canvas has been d i v i d e d i n t o three h o r i z o n t a l areas; the upper s e c t i o n r e d , the middle, y e l l o w , and the bottom, mottled black and green. Though each c o l o r appears separate and d i s t i n c t , a l l c o l o r s are seen i n each of the three areas. T r a n s i t i o n a l zones between each area

Page 88: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

81 are the most prominent place f o r the i n c l u s i o n of c o l o r from another area. Between the red and the y e l l o w there are patches of green and blue which stand out and sink i n t o the b o r d e r l i n e . The main area c o l o r i s also mottled w i t h a d i f f e r e n t shade 1 As can be seen on the upper y e l l o w edge, a darker l e s s v i b r a n t shade has been included t o f a c i l i t a t e the t r a n s i t i o n t o the red. Spots of blue are a l s o seen above the red area. These t r a n s i t i o n a l patch planes p r o j e c t and recede to form the "push and p u l l " e f f e c t . The darker shades at the b o r d e r l i n e s separate the c o l o r s i n an expanding d i r e c t i o n while the brightness of the red and y e l l o w contract the surface area. This con­t r a c t i o n i s caused by the extreme bri g h t n e s s of both areas which form a s i n g l e b r i g h t area. This now s i n g l e area p r o j e c t s i n r e l a t i o n t o the black-blue area t o the bottom. With the a l t e r a t i o n of focus t o the r e d , the black appears to p r o j e c t mainly because of the heaviness at the bottom of the canvas. The three areas then o s c i l l a t e p e r p e n d i c u l a r ­l y and p a r a l l e l t o the p i c t u r e plane.

Each area has been a p p l i e d i n a planar method of pure p a i n t i n g . The planes and areas of c o l o r each emit one c o l o r sense. Even the lower black area where green i s mottled i n t o the black has a s i n g l e c o l o r and r e f l e c t s not pure i n the sense of primary c o l o r s but pure i n Hofmann's sense of s i n g l e c o l o r r e f l e c t i o n . The c o l o r areas are not r e - d e f i n e d by black l i n e s as i n "Magenta and Blue" but are

Page 89: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

82 defined by the edge of each plane of c o l o r against another. No l i n e a r d e f i n i t i o n i s r equired f o r the c o l o r s are loud and c o n t r a s t i n g enough to d e f i n e t h e i r own l i m i t s . In t h i s work the c r e a t i v e and formal development have been combined i n t o a simultaneous development. The dark c o l o r s , blue over the b r i g h t ones, red, show th a t the blue was placed on the red as a formal element w i t h f u l l r e a l i z a t i o n t h a t i t would p r o j e c t and recede. I t s formal r o l e as a t r a n s i t i o n a l and u n i f y i n g device were a l s o understood. A balance i s seen i n the two blue t r a n s i t i o n a l patch planes and the two red ones. This almost p o s i t i v e and negative j u x t a p o s i t i o n i s c l e a r l y shown i n the red and black areas. The areas t h a t j u t out from the black are p a r t i a l l y r e f l e c t e d i n the r e d . A complete t r a n s f e r i s not undertaken because the red would overpower the yellow. To give the idea of semblance,the minimum amount of r e p e t i t i o n i s able t o suggest the d u p l i c a t i o n of forms. This r e p e t i t i o n of forms was seen i n e a r l i e r works such as "Magenta and Blue," but here the prominence of c o l o r i s taken i n t o account so that area of red i s decreased t o a f f o r d an e a s i e r balance w i t h the r e s t of the canvas.

While "Above Deep Waters" r e t a i n s a p a i n t e r l y and l u s h a p p l i c a t i o n of p a i n t , l a t e r works delve i n t o the realm of hard edges. "Pre-Dawn," I960, (plate VI) has a combination of the hard edge and p a i n t e r l y approach. The upper areas which are modeled w i t h heavy pigment appears

Page 90: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

83

to contrast with r i g i d rectangular areas. Actually the

rectangles, though t h e i r edges are hard, are also heavily

pigmented with ice pick points of projection. The r e l i e f

of paint creates added color and undulation of color to

that area. The b u t t e r - l i k e f e e l of the upper portions does

not represent a single color r e f l e c t i o n but a multitude i n

spite of the mottled e f f e c t . Each color stroke i s bright

enough to stand on i t s own and show i t s force. It i s a

minature canvas i n i t s e l f and r e f l e c t s as well the entire

canvas.

Areas of pure color are juxtaposed to bring the

canvas to l i f e by the v i b r a t i o n between these areas. The

f i g h t f o r supremacy of color brightness i s fought by each

and every color. Blue, normally taken to be a recessive

and diminuative color, i s able to vie with red and yellow.

By i t s surrounding a special color i n r e l a t i o n to the other

color i t achieves a vibrancy seldom seen i n blue. Yellow

areas are decreased i n size f o r the overly vibrant r e f l e c t ­

ion. Even though red i s a resounding color, the rectangles

of red at the bottom of the canvas do not appear overly

powerful. A dynamic equilibrium i s set up between the red

rectangles on bottom and the red c i r c l e and rectangle and

yellow square at the top. The yellow has been so charged

that i t continually re-echos i t s strength. The energetic

quality of the colors and the expressive application of

paint are a source of invigoration and appeal for the ob­server.

Page 91: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

84

This d i s c u s s i o n of a few of Hofmann's p a i n t i n g s has shown the u n i t y of h i s theory and p r a c t i c e . His p a i n t ­ings r e f l e c t h i s t h e o r i e s and v i c e versa. This i n t e r ­r e l a t i o n s h i p does not suggest t h a t p a i n t i n g n a t u r a l l y leads t o t h e o r i z i n g or v i c e versa, but r e f l e c t s t h e i r mutual dependence f o r Hofmann's development.

Hofmann's t h e o r e t i c a l w r i t i n g s have extended over a period of f i f t y years. His w r i t i n g s have explained h i s approach t o a r t . Though t h i s theory changes from year t o year, these changes derive not from c o n t r a d i c t i o n but from h i s f u r t h e r explanation and c l e a r e r d e f i n i t i o n s . The f o l l o w i n g paragraphs w i l l summarize these t h e o r i e s and t h e i r changes.

The a r t i s t has an inborn c h a r a c t e r i s t i c , an i n d e s c r i b ­able s e n s i t i v i t y f o r q u a l i t y . With t h i s c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of hyper-awareness, h i s teacher i s able t o lead the young a r t i s t t o h i s n a t u r a l g i f t , not by prodding, but by sympathetic and understanding d i r e c t i o n . The a r t i s t l e a r n s to see i n nature the i n t r i n s i c values of animate and inanimate o b j e c t s . Hofmann f e l t t h a t an a r t i s t must have the a b i l i t y to empathize, to s p i r i t u a l l y p r o j e c t i n order t o c r e a t e . The a r t i s t f e e l s i n t o them and receives from nature i t s c r e a t i v e q u a l i t y . Nature, through the a r t i s t ' s n a t u r a l g i f t , i n s p i r e s and s t i m u l a t e s him t o create as nature does. Nature's r o l e as i n s p i r a t i o n f o r c r e a t i n g was dominant throughout Hofmann's w r i t i n g s .

Page 92: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

85 This c r e a t i o n i s not an o b j e c t i v e i m i t a t i o n of nature f o r that would be photographic and shows nothing of the a r t i s t ' s temperament. He must have an open mind f o r the n o n - f i g u r a t i v e because that receptiveness allows the grea t e s t p o s s i b i l i t y f o r the p i c t o r i a l i z a t i o n of the a r t i s t h i m s e l f . As e a r l y as 1915, Hofmann had s a i d t h a t he would not i m i t a t e nature, but l e t form evolve from the " a r t i s t ' s experiences evoked by o b j e c t i v e r e a l i t y and the a r t i s t ' s command of the s p i r i t u a l means of the f i n e a r t s through which t h i s a r t i s t i c experience i s

188 transformed by him i n t o r e a l i t y i n the p a i n t i n g . "

The a r t i s t r e a l i z e s the workings of h i s mind and senses. The a c t u a l p h y s i c a l l i m i t a t i o n of h i s senses leads him t o perceptions which are u n r e a l . In 1932, Hofmann r e a l i z e d t h a t o b j e c t i v e r e a l i t y , nature, had the appearance of two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y on the observers senses. The e f f e c t of o b j e c t i v e r e a l i t y on the observer i s not two dimensional as i n appearance but three dimensional as i n nature. Through the accumulation of the experience of nature t o th a t moment, the e f f e c t of o b j e c t i v e nature's appearance on the observer has the semblance of being three dimensional.

Hofmann, "Prospectus f o r Munich School ...," 1915, p.56.

Page 93: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

The perceptual r e a c t i o n t o a p i c t u r e plane p a r a l l e l the perception of nature. The p i c t u r e surface w i t h pigment a p p l i e d i s de f a c t o , two dimensional. The e f f e c t on our perception i s three dimensional because of the

189 inherent laws of the p i c t u r e plane as s t a t e d i n 1931 and the volume forming q u a l i t y of c o l o r which was d i s c u s s ­ed i n 1951. The p i c t u r e plane r e a c t s with an equal and opposite f o r c e t o t h a t which i s a p p l i e d . The a p p l i e d and r e a c t i o n f o r c e depends on the advancing and receding q u a l i t y of c o l o r and form. Luminous and c o n t r a s t i n g c o l o r s tend to advance as do l a r g e and dominant forms.

The a r t i s t i s able t o achieve the q u a l i t i e s of appearance and e f f e c t by empathizing i n t o nature and i n t o the medium of expression. By empathizing i n t o nature, he i s stimulated and i n s p i r e d . By f e e l i n g i n t o the nature of the medium, i t s laws and i t s inherent q u a l i t i e s , the a r t i s t i s able to use the medium of e x p r e s s i o n t o i t s best ends. With an empathetie a t t i t u d e , the a r t i s t i s able t o f e e l i n t o anything and t o use i t as a means of expression.

How and where the medium of expression i s a p p l i e d t o the canvas w i l l determine the form i n a p a i n t i n g . Hofmann said i n 193.1 t h a t the formal elements c o n s i s t e d

Hofmann, "On the Aims of A r t , " 1931, p. 7-11

Page 94: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

87 of l i n e s , planes, volumes and the r e s u l t i n g formal

190 complexes. . In 1948 he became more attached to the planar concept and s a i d that the l i n e was only the meeting of two planes and that volumes were a r e g u l a t e d s e r i e s of planes. Hofmann's e a r l y w r i t i n g s do not consider c o l o r as a formal element but a c r e a t i v e one. During 1951 he developed the idea that because of c o l o r ' s volume form­i n g q u a l i t y , c o l o r i n c r e a s i n g l y became a formal element. Hofmann went so f a r as t o say that c o l o r was a formal element but q u i c k l y r e a l i z e d t h a t c o l o r e x i s t e d because of l i g h t on form. In the 1955 a r t i c l e , "The Color Problem i n Pure P a i n t i n g , " Hofmann r e s o l v e d the question of form and c o l o r ; they e x i s t together. The development of form and c o l o r must occur simultaneously.

Through the i n t e r w o r k i n g of form and c o l o r , " i n t e r v a l s " are set up i n which two p h y s i c a l c a r r i e r s are v i s u a l l y r e l a t e d to form a non-physical higher t h i r d . This h y p e r - p h y s i c a l overtone governs the r e a c t i o n between the two separate c a r r i e r s . The " r e l a t i o n " between them i s a simultaneous a c c e l e r a t e d i n t e n s i f i c a t i o n or d i m i n u t i o n . The v a r i a t i o n of such f o r c e s over the whole surface of the canvas creates rhythms, a time and i n t e n s i t y f a c t o r which the a r t i s t governs w i t h h i s temper-

Hofmann, E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue Berkeley, 1931.

Page 95: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

SB

ament. The balance of the f o r c e s develops tensions and a sense of dynamic e q u i l i b r i u m .

The a l t e r n a t i o n between an o v e r a l l t e n s i o n and d i r e c t e d f o r c e s , i n c i t e s w i t h i n the observer the f e e l i n g of movement. The observer perceives the change from two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y to three d i m e n s i o n a l i t y and vic e versa. The balance of the "push" and the " p u l l " force i n opposite d i r e c t i o n s brings about s t a b i l i t y , w h i l e a d i f f e r e n t i a t i o n between them develops the e f f e c t of movement and dynamism w i t h i n the observer. This dynamic q u a l i t y i s caused by the observer's perception a l t e r n a t i n g between the two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y and the three d i m e n s i o n a l i t y . Push and p u l l i s the movement back and f o r t h , perpendicular t o the p i c t u r e s u r f a c e . I t i s created by the volume forming q u a l i t y of c o l o r and the r e l a t i o n s h i p of l a r g e , dominant and c o n t r a s t i n g forms. The movement p a r a l l e l t o the p i c t u r e surface i s "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n . " This move­ment i s created w i t h i n the observer by i n t e r v a l s and r e ­l a t i o n s between form and c o l o r . I n t e r v a l s play a l a r g e r r o l e because of t h e i r a b i l i t y to u n i f y or t o separate two areas of the canvas.

The c r e a t i o n of "push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n " i s the mean t o the c r e a t i o n of a r t . Art i s . v i t a l i z e d form. Movement i s the essence of L i f e ; L i f e does not e x i s t without movement. I f these movements r e ­f l e c t the a r t i s t h i m s e l f , a work of a r t has been created.

Page 96: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

89 Hofmann used p a i n t i n g t o d i s t i n g u i s h between the

two f i e l d s of a r t , the f i n e and the a p p l i e d a r t s . Symphonic p a i n t i n g , a category of the f i n e a r t s , possesses the movements of "push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n . " I t i n c i t e s w i t h i n the observer, v i t a l i t y and movement. In 1931, symphonic p a i n t i n g was d i s t i n g u i s h ­ed by t h e i r sensory and emotional d i f f e r e n t i a t i o n which would b r i n g about the e f f e c t of increased monumentality upon the senses. "In symphonic p a i n t i n g , c o l o r i s the

• • 191 r e a l b u i l d i n g medium." This 1948 statement by Hofmann r e f l e c t s the increased r o l e c o l o r developed i n h i s t h e o r e t i c a l w r i t i n g s . Symphonic p a i n t i n g s i s a l s o created by the a r t i s t who becomes e m p a t h e t i c a l l y "aware of the i n t r i n s i c q u a l i t i e s of the medium of expression."192 j n

d e c o r a t i v e p a i n t i n g , a category of the a p p l i e d a r t s , the a r t i s t can a l s o empathize but he s t r i v e s mainly f o r great­er s i m p l i f i c a t i o n . The decorative p a i n t i n g w i l l l a c k the e f f e c t of p l a s t i c movement because i t s s i m p l i f i c a t i o n r e s u l t s i n a t o t a l l y two dimensional p i c t o r i a l space. The e f f e c t of p l a s t i c movement d i f f e r e n t i a t e s symphonic p a i n t i n g from decorative p a i n t i n g . Hofmann summarized these d i f f e r e n c e s i n 1952. He s a i d t h a t symphonic p a i n t -

•^Hofmann, Search f o r the Re a l , 1948, p.73. 192 * I b i d . , p. 52.

Page 97: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

9Q

i n g and decorative p a i n t i n g d i f f e r " i n the c r e a t i o n of q u a l i t y through which the image created becomes s e l f -

193 evident." By " q u a l i t y " Hofmann incorporated the c r e a t i v e a c t . The c r e a t i v e act e n t a i l s Nature. An empathetic a t t i t u d e t o Nature enables the a r t i s t t o sense Nature's c r e a t i v i t y . Nature's c r e a t i v i t y i n s p i r e s the a r t i s t to create the p i c t o r i a l r e a l i z a t i o n of dynamic movements of o s c i l l a t i o n between the two and three dimensional planes. The two d i m e n s i o n a l i t y of the p i c t u r e plane i s r e t a i n e d because of the dynamic e q u i l i b r i u m that r e s u l t s from a balance of the f o r c e s of "push" and " p u l l " and those of "expansion"and "con­t r a c t i o n . " The r e s u l t i n g symphonic p a i n t i n g has an

194 i n t i m a c y , a l y r i c i s m and a r i c h o r c h e s t r a t i o n .

This p a i n t i n g i s a c u l t u r a l documentation of the 195

time i n which i t was created. I t r e l e a s e s the observer from the monotonous schedule of everyday l i f e . I t has a new r e a l i t y of i t s own because i t i s based on the p e r s o n a l i t y of the a r t i s t ' s s o u l , mind, s e n s i b i l i t y and temperament. I t g l o r i f i e s the human s p i r i t and keeps i t i n a state of e t e r n a l r e j u v e n a t i o n . The humanistic and

193 Hofmann, "A Statement ...," 1952.

194 Loc. c i t .

195 Loc. c i t .

Page 98: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

91 c u l t u r a l s p i r i t which t h i s p a i n t i n g captures, are r e t a i n e d i n t h i s work of a r t i f i t remains i n the same p h y s i c a l s t a t e . This s p i r i t i n the p a i n t i n g i s above the n a t u r a l world. I t e n d l e s s l y emits the l i f e experience of the a r t i s t to the viewer. I t i s t h i s s p i r i t which Hofmann t r i e d t o capture i n h i s own work and t r i e d t o i n c i t e i n h i s students.

Page 99: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

CHAPTER I I I

THE WEST-COAST CANADIAN STUDENTS OF THE HANS HOFMANN SCHOOL OF ART

During the l a t e f o r t i e s and e a r l y f i f t i e s , many Canadians attended the Hans Hofmann School of Art i n New York and Provincetown. Each attended at a d i f f e r e n t time and each of t h e i r r e a c t i o n s i s d i s t i n c t . Although Hortense Gordon, Alexander Luke, J.W.G. MacDonald and Joe P l a s k e t t attended the Hofmann School, only L i o n e l Thomas, Takao Tanabe and Donald J a r v i s are discussed here because these a r t i s t - t e a c h e r s were a v a i l a b l e f o r i n t e r ­view. This chapter w i l l d i s c u s s the Hans Hofmann School of A r t i n New York and the summer school i n Provincetown i n respect t o the p h y s i c a l surroundings, the e d u c a t i o n a l approach and the p o s s i b l e e f f e c t on the p a i n t e r s of that p e r i o d . This e f f e c t w i l l be discussed i n r e l a t i o n t o Hofmann's West-Coast Canadian students, L i o n e l Thomas, Takao Tanabe and Donald J a r v i s . Their contemporary t h e o r i e s w i l l be analyzed i n r e l a t i o n t o Hofmann's t h e o r i e s which were taught at h i s New York and Province-town schools.

Hofmann's a r r i v a l i n America i n 1931 marked the s t a r t of a twenty-seven year teaching career i n h i s

Page 100: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

93 country of n a t u r a l i z a t i o n . F o l l o w i n g two years of teach­i n g at Berkeley, Los Angeles and New York, he s t a r t e d h i s own New York school i n 1933. In the f o l l o w i n g year he r e ­e s t a b l i s h e d a summer school which had been such a success i n Europe. Hofmann's school i n New York was f i r s t l o c a t e d on F i f t y - S e v e n t h Street and Lexington Avenue. I t was moved to Fifty-Second S t r e e t and Ninth Avenue and f i n a l l y t o E i g h t h Street i n Greenwich V i l l a g e . His school d i d not have the t y p i c a l a r t school atmosphere wi t h set s t i l l l i f e s , c o l o r reproductions of the o l d masters or c o l o r charts hanging on the w a l l s . In contrast t o the v i t a l i t y and i n t e r e s t i n g f a c e t s of New York C i t y , the Eighth Street s t u d i o was s t a r k and lacked atmosphere."*" During the l a t e f o r t i e s the fees averaged twenty t o t h i r t y d o l l a r s a week

2

f o r a f u l l - t i m e student. At h i s day and night c l a s s e s i n New York, Hofmann

attended each c l a s s at l e a s t two times a week e i t h e r t o d i s c u s s and t o c r i t i c i z e student work or to set up the

^Conversations w i t h Mr. W i l l i a m S. Hart, A s s o c i a t e P r o f e s s o r , U n i v e r s i t y .of B r i t i s h Columbia, Vancouver, B.C., A p r i l 14, 1966.

2 Interview w i t h Donald J a r v i s , Vancouver, B.C.,

February 1, 1966, In the f o l l o w i n g footnotes f o r m a t e r i a l obtained from i n t e r v i e w s only the name and date w i l l be given. The l o c a t i o n of the i n t e r v i e w were a l l i n Vancouver.

Page 101: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

94 f i g u r e model f o r the week. Hofmann was al o o f t o h i s students and i t was d i f f i c u l t to become acquainted w i t h

3

him. They however developed a vigorous interchange of ideas amongst themselves. Hofmann's concept of education e n t a i l e d l e s s work w i t h the i n d i v i d u a l student so th a t a

k group s p i r i t would develop. This " e s p r i t de corps" was " i n s p i r e d by the teacher, whose presence was r e q u i r e d only i n t e r m i t t a n t l y f o r c r i t i c i s m s and s u p e r v i s i o n on a p o l i c y

5 making l e v e l . "

In the drawing c l a s s c h a r c o a l was l a r g e l y used be­cause of " i t s f l e x i b i l i t y , c h a n g e a b i l i t y , t r a n s f o r m a b i l i t y and w o r k a b i l i t y . The drawings were l i k e p a i n t i n g s f o r they o f t e n took two or three days t o complete."^

The students who attended the Hofmann school had d i f f e r e n t t r a i n i n g , background and enthusiasm f o r a r t . Hofmann, however, was able t o b r i n g out the true a r t i s t

7 and the i n d i v i d u a l i n each of h i s students. Hofmann e s t a b l i s h e d a sympathetic climate t o stimulate the l e s s e r

8 t a l e n t s . He "turned them on," not by l e c t u r i n g or

^ J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966. L Thomas B. Hess, Abstract P a i n t i n g , New York,

The V i k i n g Press, 1951, p. 131.

^Loc. c i t . 6 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

7 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

°Jarvis, Feb. 1, 1966.

Page 102: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

i n s t r u c t i n g but by demonstrations, c r i t i c i s m s and h i s au t h o r a t i v e p e r s o n a l i t y and presence. Students were awe i n s p i r e d by him. They would a l l stand when he entered the room; then, one student would take h i s hat while another

9 would take h i s coat. His a b i l i t y "to come to the problem i n what was wrong w i t h a p a i n t i n g or d r a w i n g " 1 0 enabled him t o c r i t i c i z e thoroughly a piece of work done by a student. Hofmann would rework r i g h t on the student's work to the extent of r i p p i n g i t up and r e - p i e c i n g i t i n order t o

11

r e v e a l i t s new p o s s i b i l i t i e s . C r i t i c i s m s such as the one j u s t discussed were a l s o

held monthly f o r the e n t i r e school. They were "an important ' t h i n g ' . " A r t i s t s who d i d not attend Hofmann's cl a s s e s were a l s o present. At these " c r i t s " Hofmann would i n h i s poor and broken E n g l i s h , "pick everything t o

12 p i e c e s " e i t h e r through demonstration or gesture. Only a few works were thoroughly commented upon w i t h h i s " b o l d -

13

stroke c r i t i c i s m s " and v i b r a n t p e r s o n a l i t y . Hofmann's summer school at Provincetown had much

the same c l a s s s i t u a t i o n and approach as h i s New York ^Takao Tanabe, March 26 , 1966, Vancouver, B.C.

1 0 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966. 11

L i o n e l Thomas, Associate P r o f e s s o r , U n i v e r s i t y of B r i t i s h Columbia, Vancouver, B.C., January 25 , 1966.

1 2 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966. 1 3 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

Page 103: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

96 s c h o o l . In both, the students drew d i r e c t l y from the f i g u r e model. In New York they were more di v e r s e and

14 i n t e r e s t i n g . Provincetown models tended t o be as f u l l

15 and Germanic as Rubenesque f i g u r e s . At the summer sch o o l , models were employed f o r the morning s e s s i o n . Landscapes and s t i l l l i f e s could be used by the student i n the a f t e r ­noon i f he so d e s i r e d . Landscapes were often chosen be­cause of t h e i r n a t u r a l dynamic q u a l i t y and the enjoyment deriv e d from nature.

N i g h t l y c r i t i c i s m s were held on the day's work. These c r i t i c i s m s , u n l i k e those i n New York, were more int i m a t e and l e s s t h e a t r i c a l . The student could get t o know h i s teacher on a more personal b a s i s and exchange ideas w i t h him. The a r t c r i t i c , Harold Rosenberg, has

16 s a i d t h a t many s p i n s t e r s attended the summer school but L i o n e l Thomas, one of the students, s a i d there were only

17 a few "non-serious students." I n any case, Hofmann f e l t t h a t the school provided them w i t h "an experience not other-

18 wise a v a i l a b l e t o them."

1 4 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966. 15

Thomas, Jan. 18, 1966. "^Harold Rosenberg, "Hans Hofmann's L i f e C l a s s , "

P o r t f o l i o and A r t News Annual, no.6, Autumn, 1962, p. 110. 17

Thomas, Jan. 18, 1966. 18 Rosenberg, "Hans Hofmann L i f e C l a s s , " p. 110.

Page 104: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

97

I t i s d o u b t f u l that Hofmann's students understood h i s teachings on f i r s t attempt because of h i s metaphysical terminology and broken E n g l i s h . Donald J a r v i s , f o r example, s a i d t h a t he r e a l i z e d what Hofmann meant "by h i n d -

C^zanne, Cubism, Fauvism and Expressionism were not d i s ­cussed as such, but they were included i n Hofmann's new p i c t o r i a l approach f o r "teaching modern a r t as a

20 t r a d i t i o n . "

Harold Rosenberg s a i d i n h i s 1962 a r t i c l e , "Hans Hofmann's L i f e C l a s s , " t h a t " n e i t h e r f i n a n c i a l l y nor as an i n i t i a t i n g f o r c e was -the Hofmann school a success be-

21

cause of the a d u l t e r a t i o n of time, place and s i t u a t i o n . " I n s p i t e of the f a c t t h a t Hofmann's school d i d not emphasize a c u l t u r a l documentation of h i s time, i n the sense of s o c i a l r e a l i s m of the t h i r t i e s and f o r t i e s h i s school was able t o b u i l d up an i n t e l l e c t u a l b a s i s f o r the development of a b s t r a c t expressionism. While none of

22

the Abstract E x p r e s s i o n i s t s attended h i s sch o o l , they s o c i a l i z e d w i t h a r t i s t s f a m i l i a r w i t h Hofmann's t h e o r i e s .

s i g h t i n h i s own p a i n t i n g s . 19 The t h e o r i e s of Mondrian

19 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

20 Rosenberg, "Hans Hofmann's L i f e C l a s s , " p. 28-.

21 I b i d p. 112.

22 I b i d p. 110.

Page 105: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

98

The i n t e l l e c t u a l and academic b a s i s f o r t h e i r work ' n a t u r a l l y a f f e c t e d the A b s t r a c t E x p r e s s i o n i s t s . The A b s t r a c t E x p r e s s i o n i s t s would not n e c e s s a r i l y accept or r e j e c t Hofmann's t h e o r i e s but r a t h e r , they would develop an i n t e l l e c t u a l and academic a t t i t u d e i n c r i t i c a l l y a n a l y z i n g t h e i r own works. Hofmann's t h i n k i n g "taught the act of c r e a t i o n i n p a i n t i n g by u p l i f t i n g the student's

23 s p i r i t w hile e n l i g h t e n i n g h i s mind."

During the l a t e f o r t i e s and e a r l y f i f t i e s , Canadian students invaded Hofmann's c l a s s e s i n f o r c e . Hortense Gordon of Hamilton, Alexander Luke and Ronald Lambert of Oshawa, Joe P l a s k e t t of New Westminster and L i o n e l Thomas of Vancouver came i n 1947. J.W.G. MacDonald and Donald

24 J a r v i s attended c l a s s e s i n 1948 and Takao Tanabe i n 1951.

Three West-Coast Canadians, L i o n e l Thomas, Takao Tanabe and Donald J a r v i s , a l l p r e s e n t l y a r t i s t s - t e a c h e r s , have each reacted d i f f e r e n t l y to h i s teachings. Although they attended the school at d i f f e r e n t periods and at d i f f e r e n t p l a c e s , t h e i r i n d i v i d u a l p e r s o n a l i t i e s and divergent s i t u a t i o n s account f o r t h e i r v a r y i n g responses. Each i n d i v i d u a l a r t i s t ' s contemporary t h e o r i e s of a r t w i l l now be discussed i n r e l a t i o n t o Hofmann's teachings at the New York and Provincetown schools.

I b i d . , p. 113• 2 i fTanabe, March 29, 1966.

Page 106: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

99

L i o n e l Thomas a t t e n d e d t h e H o f m a n n summer s c h o o l

a t P r o v i n c e t o w n , i n 1 9 4 7 , f o r t w o a n d a h a l f m o n t h s t h e r e .

P a r t o f t h i s t i m e w a s s p e n t a s a p r i v a t e s t u d e n t b e f o r e

t h e r e g u l a r summer s c h o o l b e g a n . He became p e r s o n a l l y

a c q u a i n t e d w i t h H o f m a n n i n t h e i r many d i s c u s s i o n s i n t h e

e v e n i n g s a f t e r c l a s s e s . D u r i n g t h e s e c o n v e r s a t i o n s ,

Thomas came t o u n d e r s t a n d more c l e a r l y H o f m a n n ' s i d e a l s

a n d h i s t e a c h i n g s .

H a n s H o f m a n n , t h e t e a c h e r , a n d L i o n e l T h o m a s , t h e

s t u d e n t , b o t h b e l i e v e t h a t N a t u r e i s t h e s o u r c e o f

i n s p i r a t i o n f o r t h e c r e a t i o n o f a w o r k o f a r t . B o t h t h e i r

c l a s s e s e m p l o y t h e human m o d e l b e c a u s e o f i t s " i n h e r e n t 2 5

m o t i o n " t o g i v e t h e g r e a t e s t s t i m u l a t i o n i n t h e d i r e c t ­

i o n o f t h e e n e r g y e n d o w e d s p a c e , w h i c h i s p a r t o f N a t u r e .

Thomas s a i d t h a t t h i s i n s p i r a t i o n w a s n o t a l w a y s p r e s e n t .

H o w e v e r , when h e d o e s h a v e t h e i n s p i r a t i o n , h i s w h o l e

b e i n g comes a l i v e a n d he h a s t o e x p r e s s i t . The

i n s p i r a t i o n c a n be s t o r e d m e n t a l l y a n d l a t e r summoned t o

t h e c o n s c i o u s l e v e l . F o r e x a m p l e , w h e n he p a i n t e d " R o c k

F o r m on a B o t t o m o f a P o o l , " he h a d " a n a c t u a l e x p e r i e n c e 26

a n d p a i n t e d i t s u b j e c t i v e l y a week l a t e r i n h i s s t u d i o . "

2 5 T h o m a s , J a n . IB, 1 9 6 6 .

? 6 L i o n e l T h o m a s , c i t e d i n " C o a s t t o C o a s t i n A r t :

V a n c o u v e r . P a i n t e r W i n s I n t e r n a t i o n a l A w a r d , " C a n a d i a n A r t , v o l . 9, n o . 4, Summer , 1 9 5 2 , p . 1 6 9 .

Page 107: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

166 Hofmann stated s i m i l a r l y that "everything comes from nature; I too am a part of nature; my memory comes from

27 nature." Both received t h e i r i n s p i r a t i o n from nature and stored i t mentally f o r l a t e r use. The s i m i l a r i t y of these two statements does not n e c e s s a r i l y imply that Thomas adopted Hofmann's ideology. In t h i s case, as i n others t o f o l l o w , the b a s i c source of i n s p i r a t i o n and the idea of what a work of a r t i s , could w e l l have been developed by the a r t i s t before h i s a r r i v a l at the Hofmann

28 school and r e i n f o r c e d t h e r e .

Thomas believes t h a t "the sources of a r t are 29

mysterious." , Hofmann's metaphysical and nebulous s t y l e of w r i t i n g and h i s a t t r i b u t e d q u a l i t y of a work of a r t a l s o e x h i b i t e d t h i s mysteriousness. Hofmann t r i e d to discuss and analyze t h i s mysterious source but Thomas b e l i e v e s i t cannot be v e r b a l l y expressed. Thomas i s more c o n s i s t e n t , f o r Hofmann c o n t r a d i c t e d himself by w r i t i n g on that mysterious source. Hofmann wrote t h a t an idea 27

Hans Hofmann, c i t e d i n E l i z a b e t h P o l l e t , "Hans Hofmann," A r t s , v o l . 31, no. 8, May, 1957, p. 30.

28 The problem of a c t u a l i n f l u e n c e can only be i n ­

f e r r e d except i n cases where the a r t i s t a c t u a l l y uses Hofmann's terms and t h e o r i e s d i r e c t l y . Q u a l i f i e d academic s p e c u l a t i o n must be used because an a r t i s t s e l ­dom admits t h a t he has been i n f l u e n c e d by another a r t i s t .

29 Thomas, Jan. 19, 1966.

Page 108: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

has a c e r t a i n s p e c i f i c medium through which i t can be 30

expressed. His attempt t o express the s p i r i t u a l v e r b a l l y , forced him to w r i t e i n a nebulous, metaphysical s t y l e . Thomas does not attempt such a goal f o r he r e a l i z e s i t s u n a t t a i n a b i l i t y .

Their b a s i c concept of a work of. a r t i s s i m i l a r but Hofmann had a more extensive d e f i n i t i o n . Thomas b e l i e v e s that the f i n i s h e d work of a r t contains a s i n g l e i d e a .

31 This i d e a , c a l l e d ""baraka" by the Arabs, i s t i m e l e s s . I t i n c l u d e s the a r t i s t ' s f e e l i n g f o r q u a l i t y . While Hofmann d i d not use the term "baraka," he expressed a s i m i l a r idea concerning an a r t i s t ' s " h i g h l y developed

32 s e n s i t i v i t y f o r q u a l i t y . " Hofmann's concept of a work of a r t i s f u r t h e r defined f o r he s a i d t h a t i t must appear to possess a dynamic energy t o i n v i g o r a t e the viewer. Hofmann's " s i n g l e idea" has been w e l l defined w h i l e Thomas i s more vague and general.

Both Hofmann and Thomas b e l i e v e that adult a r t i s t s r e l y on t h e i r consciousness of experiences; t h a t i s t h e i r senses. Thomas adds c r i t i c i s m s of the young a r t i s t s who o f t e n take drugs or a l c o h o l i n order to achieve unique and 3 QHans Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , Andover,Mass., The Addison G a l l e r y of American A r t , 1948, p. 46.

3 1Thomas, Jan. 19, 1966. J Hans Hofmann, " P a i n t i n g And C u l t u r e , " F o r t n i g h t l y ,

v o l . 1, no. 1, September 11, 1931, p. 5.

Page 109: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

u n n a t u r a l experiences. Hofmann makes no references t o t h i s method.

Thomas p e r s o n a l l y f e e l s t h a t he does not need a r t i f i c i a l s t i m u l i i n order t o have an experience. By l i v i n g n a t u r a l l y , he i s able t o use these experiences t o depict h i s images to the viewer. Although i n 1949 he studied under Mark Rothko, an i c o n o c l a s t , Thomas s t i l l b e l i e v e s that man n a t u r a l l y sees images. He gave the example of Leonardo da V i n c i who s a i d t h a t man saw images i n stone w a l l s , and of Hamlet, who saw the image of h i s

34 f a t h e r i n the clouds. Thomas e x p l a i n s h i s murals and sc u l p t u r e s as symbols of c e r t a i n aspects of l i f e . His mural outside the Brock H a l l Extension e x e m p l i f i e s t h i s point c l e a r l y . Each r e c t a n g u l a r u n i t of the mural r e ­presents one department of the u n i v e r s i t y . These images, as w e l l as the r e s t of Thomas' images, are d e r i v e d from h i s knowledge of cubism and the other "isms" of the twent i e t h century.

Thomas' image making q u a l i t y i s h i s personal development. Hofmann never wrote about the p o s s i b i l i t i e s of images and symbols. However, a few of h i s p a i n t i n g s present images which he d i d not con s c i o u s l y t r y t o achieve.

Thomas, Jan. 19, 1966.

Thomas, Jan. 18, 1966.

Page 110: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

103'. Another personal q u a l i t y of Thomas th a t d i f f e r s

from Hofmann i s Thomas' hab i t of mentioning names of w e l l known t w e n t i e t h century a r t i s t s . Hofmann who worked and st u d i e d w i t h these f i g u r e s , r a r e l y mentioned t h e i r names. Thomas has read e x t e n s i v e l y on the subject and theory of twent i e t h century a r t i s t s but he has not used the know­ledge t o h i s advantage. He only r e t a i n s a few outstand­i n g ideas and synthesizes them po o r l y . Thomas f e e l s an academic a t t i t u d e can destroy an a r t i s t by too much i n t e l l e c t u a l i t y . Thomas i s i n agreement w i t h Hofmann f o r the l a t t e r s a i d t h a t there should be a blending together of the r a t i o n a l and the i r r a t i o n a l . Thomas attempts t o achieve t h i s w i t h h i s r a t i o n a l approach t o modern twe n t i e t h century a r t but he does not completely under­stand these t h e o r i e s or has not made them a part of him­s e l f . He attaches himself t o them and uses them when he wishes, but they cannot do what he wants them t o do. This i s apparent i n Thomas' teaching when he uses a famous t w e n t i e t h century a r t i s t to e x p l a i n a c e r t a i n p o i n t to h i s students. He s t a r t s o f f w i t h an a r t i s t ' s theory but h i s i r r a t i o n a l p e r s o n a l i t y takes over and he lo s e s the students i n a contrast of terms, thoughts and a c t i o n s .

Both Thomas and Hofmann b e l i e v e that a r t cannot be taught as such. The a r t i s t has an "inborn s e n s i t i v i t y , " as Hofmann would c a l l i t , or "baraka," Thomas' term. The teacher does not t e l l the student formulas and design

Page 111: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

"104

techniques f o r the s o l u t i o n of the bare canvas, but he must l e a d and d i r e c t the student to the use and expression of that inborn q u a l i t y .

Thomas teaches i n a s i m i l a r manner as Hofmann d i d . Both leave t h e i r students alone to solve t h e i r i n d i v i d u a l problems. However, Thomas d i f f e r s from Hofmann i n that Thomas l e c t u r e s on technique and theory. Theory i s not

35 given at random but only t o " r e c e p t i v e students." Thomas f e e l s t h a t i f a design formula i s given t o any hack­neyed a r t i s t , the formula would be worked t o the ground and would a l s o be a f f e c t e d d e t r i m e n t a l l y .

Thomas' t h e a t r i c a l p r e s e n t a t i o n of ideas r e s u l t s i n the same atmosphere as Hofmann achieved. Thomas, when i n the proper mood, i s v i b r a n t and a u t h o r a t i v e . He w i l l command a t t e n t i o n w i t h a l l means a v a i l a b l e , e i t h e r by shock, humour or awe. His ideas are u s u a l l y incomprehensible t o the unacquainted student but can be a means of expression f o r the student when he has grasped the concept. Thomas, a l s o l i k e Hofmann provides, an "experience to students not

36-otherwise a v a i l a b l e to them."

In Thomas' drawing c l a s s e s he suggests s t a r t i n g w i t h the sphere, cone, cube and c y l i n d e r . Thomas d i f f e r s from

3 5 ^Thomas, Jan. 19, 1966.

3 6Rosenberg, "Hans Hofmann's L i f e C l a s s , " 1962, p.110,

Page 112: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

105 Hofmann*s approach i n that Thomas has taken objects which r e s u l t from the planar concept as Hofmann had taught. Thomas has to dea l w i t h students w i t h l i t t l e or no b a s i c drawing background. He s t a r t s w i t h e a s i e r concepts and g r a d u a l l y introduces the idea of planar depth by j u x t a ­p o s i t i o n and s h i f t i n g which are the same as those expound­ed by Hofmann.

The above m a t e r i a l does not appear to show s t r i c t f a c t u a l s i m i l a r i t i e s between student and teacher. Having received a course i n "Basic Design" from Mr. Thomas, one

37

i s able to see these s i m i l a r i t i e s i n b e t t e r p e r s p e c t i v e . The most prominent aspect would be Thomas' teaching of the concept of "push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n . " Thomas develops these concepts f i r s t i n the terms of form and then c o l o r . He, much l i k e Hofmann, brandishes these terms around without e x p l a i n i n g what he means. The students are stunned by h i s terminology. I f the student i s percept­i v e enough t o r e a l i z e what Thomas means, he w i l l apply i t c o r r e c t l y but the m a j o r i t y of students use the formula d i r e c t l y and present nothing of t h e i r own. The r e s u l t i s a classroom of the same poor s o l u t i o n s . When d i s c u s s i n g such f o r c e s as "push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a c t ­i o n , " Thomas himself has not f u l l y grasped the meaning

37 The w r i t e r studied w i t h Mr .Lionel. Thomas i n 1962-

6 3 , at the U n i v e r s i t y of B r i t i s h Columbia. The course taken was Fine A r t s 228, Basic Design.

Page 113: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

1 0 6

t h a t Hofmann a s c r i b e d t o each term. To Thomas, they are one i n the same term but i n f a c t t h e i r f o r c e s are perpendicular to each other.

Thomas a l s o teaches the use of c o l o r t o achieve a s p a t i a l q u a l i t y which he l e a r n t from the Hofmann school. Hofmann s a i d that c o l o r has the i n t r i n s i c q u a l i t y t o create volume. Thomas has taken a s i m i l a r a t t i t u d e , f o r i n h i s i n t e r i o r designs, c o l o r i s "thought of as an element of a r c h i t e c t u r e and not 'decor'. I t i s three dimensional,

38

s p a t i a l and s t r u c t u r a l . " The s p a t i a l enhancement of a r c h i t e c t u r a l i n t e r i o r s w i t h c o l o r has enabled him to be­come more aware of i t i n h i s other a r t forms, such as s c u l p t u r e .

Thomas' awareness of m a t e r i a l , a c t u a l l y empathizing i n t o i t , has made him "u n a f r a i d to work i n any medium." 3 9

Thomas b e l i e v e s the a b i l i t y t o p r o j e c t i s c r e a t i v e . Empathy i s a q u a l i t y inherent w i t h i n the a r t i s t . Not only i s the conscious mind i n v o l v e d but there i s a backing from the unconscious, which enables a "quiet love between the a r t i s t and the medium." 4 0 This empathetic a t t i t u d e i s not taught or suggested by Thomas. This f a c e t of the education

^ L i o n e l Thomas, c i t e d i n Rene Boux, "An A r t i s t Re­l a t e s h i s S k i l l to A r c h i t e c t u r e , " Canadian A r t , v o l . 13, no. 1, Autumn, 1955, p. 203-205.

39 ' L i o n e l Thomas, c i t e d i n Stephen F r a n k l i n , "Busy

A r t i s t , " Weekend Magazine, v o l . 8 , no. 2, 1958, p. 14. 40 Thomas, Jan. 19, 1966.

Page 114: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

107 of the a r t i s t was however presented by Hofmann. He t r i e d t o i n c i t e w i t h i n h i s students the perception of the inner q u a l i t y of animate and inanimate o b j e c t s .

What Thomas teaches should not t o be accepted as f a c t , although he can imply i t . He presents the ideas of "push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a t i o n " from Hofmann, the use of l i n e from K l e e , the p u r i t y of form and c o l o r from Mondrian, the images from P i c a s s o , the c o l o r from the German E x p r e s s i o n i s t s and the s c i e n t i f i c and p h i l o s o p h i c a t t i t u d e s of modern man. He has taken t w e n t i e t h century a r t and presented the best of i t s ideas to h i s p u p i l s . He has not developed a s y n t h e t i c theory as Hofmann has, but attempts t o present the b a s i s and the theory i t s e l f .

However, Thomas has been i n f l u e n c e d by Hofmann Ts te a c h i n g method. Both are not educators of set a r t i s t i c viewpoints and problem s o l u t i o n s , but are educators i n the sense of s t i m u l a t o r s of minds f o r the s o l u t i o n of problems set up by the p u p i l h i m s e l f . Guide posts and p o i n t e r s are a v a i l a b l e f o r the student, but what the student achieves i s dependent s o l e l y on h i s a b i l i t y to use h i s inborn a r t i s t i c q u a l i t i e s .

G e n e r a l l y , Thomas, l i k e Hofmann, has helped , t o st i m u l a t e h i s students, t o educate the p u b l i c and to b u i l d up an a r t i s t i c c l imate w i t h i n t h e i r i n d i v i d u a l environments. While the scope of Hofmann's i n f l u e n c e i s i n t e r n a t i o n a l , Thomas' has tended t o be p a r o c h i a l .

Page 115: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

108 In c o n t r a s t t o the s i m i l a r i t i e s of L i o n e l Thomas

and Hofmann, another West-Coast Canadian a r t i s t , Takao Tanabe, has reacted i n the opposite d i r e c t i o n . Having stayed at the Hofmann school f o r only s i x weeks and being of a d i f f e r e n t r a c i a l e x t r a c t i o n and personal outlook, the divergence between Tanabe and Hofmann i s e a s i l y d i s c e r n a b l e . However, i n s p i t e of these d i f f e r e n c e s , Tanabe may have been i n f l u e n c e d d u r i n g h i s stay at the Hofmann sc h o o l .

Takao Tanabe heard of the Hofmann school from Joe P l a s k e t t . When Tanabe a r r i v e d i n New York i n 1951, he en­r o l l e d i n Hans Hofmann's n i g h t school drawing course while a t the same time a t t e n d i n g the day school of the Brooklyn Museum of A r t . The co n t r a s t between the two schools must have been too much t o accept f o r Tanabe l e f t the Hofmann school a f t e r s i x weeks.

Tanabe's p e r s o n a l i t y can be seen through a d i s c u s s i o n of the interviews. During the f i r s t i n t e r v i e w Tanabe sta t e d t h a t he had disregarded Hofmann's ideas even before he s t a r t e d c l a s s e s there. I f such were the case, Tanabe's attendance at the 'School would have been l u d i c r o u s . Upon r e q u e s t i o n i n g , he s a i d that he was not e n t h u s i a s t i c about Hofmann's t h e o r i e s . By t h i s r e t r a c t i o n , Tanabe's p e r s o n a l ­i t y can be understood. He does not l i k e t o acknowledge h i s teachers and f e l l o w a r t i s t s who have helped him i n h i s work. I n an i n t e r v i e w he s a i d that he i s not the most j u b i l a n t and b o i s t r o u s person. He i s almost always on an even k e e l . His

Page 116: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

1Q9

i n t r o v e r t e d p e r s o n a l i t y c o n t r a s t s w i t h Thomas' extr o v e r t e d one. With the a d d i t i o n of an approach more i n keeping w i t h Tanabe's own p e r s o n a l i t y , at the day school i n Brooklyn, Hofmann's ideas d i d not have a chance t o j e l l . Hofmann»s in f l u e n c e on Tanabe cannot be s t r e s s e d because of Tanabe's opposing p e r s o n a l i t y and the short d u r a t i o n at the s c h o o l .

I t i s , however, s u r p r i s i n g t o f i n d that there are s i m i l a r i t i e s between t h e i r idea of p a i n t i n g l s i n s p i r a t i o n d e r i v i n g from nature. As was s t a t e d e a r l i e r , Hofmann be­l i e v e d t h a t nature was the source of s t i m u l a t i o n f o r the a r t i s t . S i m i l a r t o other West-Coast Canadian a r t i s t s , Tanabe has a " f e e l i n g f o r the country and f o r n a t u r e . " 4 1

H i s r e p r e s e n t a t i o n s of landscape are n a t u r a l , and are "not of a s p e c i f i c time and p l a c e . " 4 2 In contrast t o Hofmann's metaphysical landscape i n which the a r t i s t represents the unseen p o r t i o n of nature, (nature's c r e a t i v i t y ) Tanabe's

landscape canvases are"not landscapes of the s o u l or 'inner 43

eye'." The quoted "in n e r eye" i s undoubtedly a reference t o Hofmann who Tanabe says he r e j e c t e d long ago.

41 Joe P l a s k e t t , c i t t e d i n Takao Tanabe. P a i n t i n g s

and Drawings, 1954 - 1957. (Catalogue), Vancouver Art G a l l e r y .

42 Robert F u l f o r d , "Tanabe". Canadian A r t , v o l . 18,

no. 1, Jan./Feb., 1961, p. 50. I T

Takao Tanabe: P a i n t i n g s and Drawings ..... (Catalogue), Vancouver Art G a l l e r y . .

Page 117: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

110:

Takao Tanabe's landscapes are the product of conscious empathizing i n t o the landforms and nature of B r i t i s h Columbia. This empathetic a t t i t u d e could have been i n s p i r e d by Hofmann's c l a s s e s where one i s i n i t i a t e d i n t o seeing i n t o the essences of animate and inanimate o b j e c t s . However, empathy does not need t o be taught. I t can be acquired by a perceptive and s e n s i t i v e person such as Tanabe. His r a c i a l background would a l s o lead him t o such f e e l i n g s of the n a t u r a l world. (This l a t t e r f a c t should not be emphasized f o r Tanabe was brought up i n a western c u l t u r e and h i s contact w i t h the o r i e n t was h i s Japanese ancestory, p a r e n t a l t u t e l a g e at home and h i s recent t r i p t o Japan). Because i t i s not known what empathetic f e e l ­ings Tanabe had before h i s s i x weeks at the Hofmann school, one cannot a t t r i b u t e h i s p r o j e c t i v e f e e l i n g s t o Hofmann.

The i n f l u e n t i a l r o l e of Hofmann on Tanabe i s tenuous. Joe P l a s k e t t quotes Tanabe concerning c a l l i g r a p h y , " I have broken away from the d e f i n i t e plane extensions of form b u i l d i n g and volume d e f i n i n g of Hofmann." 4 4 When Tanabe was attending the school, Hofmann had not solved the problem of form and c o l o r . L a t e r i n h i s development, c o l o r and form develop simultaneously. Tanabe i n h i s own develop-

Joe P l a s k e t t , "Some New Canadian P a i n t e r s and t h e i r Debt t o Hans Hofmann." Canadian A r t , v o l . x, no. 2, Winter, 1953, p. 61 .

Page 118: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

ment a l s o achieves the same e f f e c t . "Landscape of an I n t e r i o r Space" ( p l a t e VII) e x h i b i t s a planar c o n t r o l of c o l o r . As i n Hofmann's "Le G i l o t i n " , Tanabe has used each stroke of the brush as a plane of pure c o l o r . D i f f e r e n t c o l o r s stand against i t s neighbouring ones t o define the edges, not by l i n e s , but by co n t r a s t of c o l o r . While Tanabe's a p p l i c a t i o n of pai n t i s not as l u s h as Hofmann's " G i l o t i n " or "Pre-Dawn", Tanabe i s able to create a r i c h creamy e f f e c t by the contrast of ye l l o w t o the white ground and ju x t a p o s i n g black planar l i n e s . The mottled areas of the, ground r e f l e c t the c o l o r s which are l a i d on top. The r h y t h m i c a l f l o w of the staccato y e l l o w and black v e r t i c a l s undulate the canvas. This achieves the e f f e c t of "push and p u l l " but Tanabe undoubtedly would not c a l l i t by Hofmann's terms. The contrast of organic shapes t o the lower l e f t and the v e r t i c a l p lay of rhythms across the canvas have a n a t u r e - l i k e f e e l . There i s a f e e l i n g of growth. Tanabe has f e l t nature's c r e a t i v e q u a l i t y and p i e t o r i a l i z e d i t i n an i n t e r p l a y of v i v i d l y harmonizing c o l o r s .

This organic f e e l i n g f o r nature could be r e l a t e d t o t h a t of Hofmann, but Tanabe denies such a f f i n i t i e s . Though s i m i l a r ideas can be seen i n Takao Tanabe and Hans Hofmann, the teacher's i n f l u e n c e on the student cannot be s u b s t a n t i a t e d . I f Hofmann was i n an i n f l u e n t i a l p o s i t i o n t h a t aspect has been c o n s t r i c t e d , denunciated and f o r g o t t e n

Page 119: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

112 by Takao Tanabe.

In contrast t o Takao Tanabe, Donald J a r v i s has developed from the ideas of Hans Hofmann's school and formulated h i s own personal statement about a r t . These t h e o r i e s do not r a d i c a l l y d i f f e r from those of h i s teacher but r a t h e r are a personal r e a c t i o n t o those developed by Hofmann.

Donald J a r v i s who heard of the Hofmann school from L i o n e l Thomas attended the morning c l a s s e s of Hofmann's N.ew York school i n 1948. He had j u s t graduated from the Vancouver Art School, and was l i m i t e d f i n a n c i a l l y when he a p p l i e d f o r admission. He t o l d Hofmann of h i s predicament and Hofmann gave him a job as a night monitor t o pay f o r the t u i t i o n . Harold Rosenberg has s a i d that "Hofmann and h i s wife got caught up i n the personal l i v e s of h i s

45 students." J a r v i s was such an involvement. His job as ni g h t monitor consisted of posing the model each night and making sure e v e r y t h i n g was i n order a f t e r the c l a s s was over. J a r v i s c a l l e d h imself a " g l o r i f i e d j a n i t o r . "

Through t h i s j a n i t o r i a l p o s i t i o n , J a r v i s was able t o experience and recognize the ideas of a modern master i n c o n t r a s t t o the overbearing a t t i t u d e i n the l a t e 1940's

47 of the Vancouver Art School. Although J a r v i s d i d not

45 Harold Rosenberg, The Anxious Object, New York,

Horizon P r e s s , 1962, p. 151. 4 6 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966. 47 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

Page 120: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

113 comprehend immediately the ideas of "push and p u l l " and "expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n , " through hind s i g h t i n h i s own p a i n t i n g s he r e a l i z e d the d i r e c t i o n a l d i f f e r e n c e between them. His concepts of a " r e l a t i o n " and an " i n t e r v a l " are s t i l l vague, while he understands " t e n s i o n " t o be a balance of f o r c e s and an i m p l i e d r e l a t i o n s h i p . Hofmann used the above devices t o achieve a v i b r a n t motion i n h i s p a i n t i n g s . J a r v i s f e e l s t h a t such an end i n p a i n t i n g i s narrow and makes f o r a l i m i t e d viewpoint. The idea of dynamism i s compelling and should be t r a n s l a t e d by the i n d i v i d u a l

48 a r t i s t .

J a r v i s himself has taken ideas of Hofmann and r e ­worked them w i t h h i s own p e r s o n a l i t y , e x a c t l y what Hofmann had t r i e d to i n s t i l l i n h i s students. A p a i n t i n g t o J a r v i s a f f e c t s the observer w i t h an infectuous v i t a l i t y , an idea derived from Hofmann. U n l i k e Hofmann who emphasiz­ed t h i s p o i n t , J a r v i s r e a l i z e s t h a t a work of a r t must a l s o be created w i t h a "backlog of t r a i n i n g . " 4 9 The a r t i s t i s presented w i t h problems formerly solved by o l d e r a r t i s t s . He solves these questions and develops h i s own problems and s o l u t i o n s .

His s o l u t i o n s have to be worked on over a period of time u n t i l the culminating idea i s maturated. The a r t i s t

4 ^ J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

Page 121: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

can achieve the end r e s u l t by t r i a l and e r r o r or experiment­a t i o n . J a r v i s f i n d s that h i s young students use the t r i a l and e r r o r method much more of t e n than he would. He h i m s e l f , approaches the problem much i n the same way as Hofmann had

50 by " l e t t i n g i t grow from what has preceded i t . " J a r v i s does not c o n t i n u a l l y work at the same problem u n t i l he i s s a t i s f i e d that i t has been solved but pursues a problem u n t i l he has f e l t he has produced something. L a t e r he w i l l r e t u r n t o that same question. When he has come t o a f i n a l answer, he w i l l present t h i s t o the p u b l i c . J a r v i s , at t h i s p o i n t , i s so sure of h i s s o l u t i o n t h a t he i s able and prepared t o stand behind t h a t work. I t does not n e c e s s a r i l y have t o e x h i b i t a v e r b a l statement, such as s o c i a l r e a l i s m ,

51 but can be " p a i n t e r l y means t o express p a i n t e r l y ideas." This statement by J a r v i s , i s p r a c t i c a l l y a word f o r word r e c a p i t u l a t i o n of Hofmann's statement formerly c i t e d . The s o l e act of u s i n g p a i n t e r l y means i s a l s o a f a c e t of a

52 p a i n t i n g . These means are used t o express an accumula­t i o n of past experience which w i l l r e s u l t i n form. S i m i l a r to Hofmann, J a r v i s uses experience t o d i f f e r e n t i a t e a d u l t a r t from c h i l d a r t . C h i l d r e n ' s a r t l a c k s a back-5 0 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966.

5 1 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966. 52

J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966.

Page 122: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

53 ground of experience and "gets b o r i n g a f t e r a w h i l e . " An a d u l t p a i n t i n g by being r e l a t e d t o an a r t i s t ' s experience can a l s o r e f l e c t h i s mood at that time, and thus have more depth. A work of a r t i s r e l a t e d to l i v i n g much i n the same way as Hofmann defined a canvas as a humanistic and c u l t u r a l statement.

In a r e p l y t o the question, "how should one approach a r t ? " J a r v i s answers that one must perceive t h a t work of a r t f o r "what i t i s . The observer must understand the p a i n t e r l y q u a l i t i e s . " In good and bad p a i n t i n g s of the past, one can see o b j e c t i v e nature c l e a r l y so i t i s " e a s i l y

55 pegged to hang one's thought." In contrast t o past anecdotal p a i n t i n g s , a b s t r a c t ones r e q u i r e an i n c r e a s i n g l y prepared audience who w i l l shed t h e i r p r e j u d i c e i n order t o f u l l y experience that work. Modern a r t r e q u i r e s more of the observer. Hofmann, i n a s i m i l a r statement s a i d , "see-

56 i n g w i t h awareness i s another a r t . " The observer must create h i s own v i s i o n from h i s perception of the a r t i s t ' s p i c t o r i a l l y r e a l i z e d v i s i o n . He does not need t r a i n i n g

5 3 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966. 5 4 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966. 5 5 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966. 56 J Hans Hofmann, exerpt from " I t I s , " 1959, c i t e d i n

Los Angeles County Ar t Museum, New York School, The F i r s t Generation of P a i n t i n g s of 1940's and 1950's. Los Angeles, Members of th"e Board of tEe Los Angeles County Ar t Museum, 1965, p. 17.

Page 123: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

but only a w i l l i n g n e s s t o approach a p a i n t i n g w i t h an open mind. However, i f t r a i n i n g i s g i v e n , "educate i n seeing

57

what makes a p a i n t i n g ' t i c k ' . " I f the observer can see how these mechanisms work,

he may be able t o t e l l how the a r t i s t was i n s p i r e d . What i n s p i r e s J a r v i s may be bewilderment, an observation or an i n s i g h t i n t o some aspect of o b j e c t i v e r e a l i t y . J a r v i s f e e l s t h a t t h i s i n s p i r a t i o n i s something he must express. The most important aspect I s , however, "the w i l l i n g n e s s of

r g

the a r t i s t to l e t t h i n g s grow out of the canvas." Hofmann a l s o b e l i e v e d i n the developmental process of a • p a i n t i n g . J a r v i s has a general idea of what w i l l happen on h i s canvas but he w i l l pursue any new idea t h a t occurs from a c e r t a i n s i t u a t i o n on the canvas. He does not s t i c k to-one conceptual approach l i k e Hofmann's planar one, but

59 employs a l l the t o o l s o f - " b a s i c v i s u a l language." In contrast t o Hofmann's s i n g l e approach, J a r v i s has many uses f o r c o l o r . I t may serve as an embellishment, an element, another dimension, a mood c r e a t o r or a c o n t r o l l ­i n g d e vice. U n l i k e Hofmann, who went through d i f f e r e n t stages of the r e l a t i o n s h i p between form and c o l o r , J a r v i s r e a l i s e s the p o s s i b i l i t i e s of both. Form can be "anything not to do w i t h c o l o r , as i n K l i n e , or c o l o r i s form and form i s 57 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966.

J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966. J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966.

58 59

Page 124: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

117

c o l o r , as i n M a t i s s e . T o t a l form i s the summation of a l l 60

the r e l a t i o n s h i p s w i t h i n a p a i n t i n g . " This statement i s s i m i l a r t o Hofmann*s simultaneous development of form and c o l o r i n which the p a r a l l e l development of form and c o l o r n e c e s s i t a t e s change when e i t h e r one i s extended.

J a r v i s w i l l not s t a t e d e f i n i t e l y what the purpose of a completed p a i n t i n g i s , f o r he i s not sure he knows. I t can be a form of communication; t h a t i s , an e x t e r n a l -i z a t i o n of h i s experience i n t o some form. Hofmann express­ed a s i m i l a r idea of an inner f e e l i n g p h y s i c a l l y p i c t o r i a l -i z e d but J a r v i s goes f u r t h e r when he says that " i f the viewer i s responsive t o the p a i n t i n g , the f u n c t i o n of the

61

p a i n t i n g w i l l have been f u l f i l l e d . " Hofmann i n h e r e n t l y knew h i s p a i n t i n g s would be accepted, i f not now, then i n the near f u t u r e . The d i f f e r e n c e between Hofmann and J a r v i s i s that the teacher had achieved some degree of i n t e r ­n a t i o n a l fame while h i s p u p i l i s s t i l l i n an i n f e r i o r p o s i t i o n of being known i n Vancouver and to a l e s s e r degree i n Canada. J a r v i s ' other purpose of a p a i n t i n g i s " s o c i a l i n a sense but i t does not have t o express the p l i g h t of

62

humanity." Hofmann b e l i e v e d that a p a i n t i n g should be £ c u l t u r a l statement. However, Harold Rosenberg s a i d t h a t

6 0 J a r v i s , Feb. 8 , 1966.

6 1 J a r v i s , Feb. 8 , 1966.

6 2 J a r v i s , Feb. 8 , 1966.

Page 125: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

118

Hofmann d i d not get i n v o l v e d w i t h the s o c i a l climate of America during the l a t e t h i r t i e s . Hofmann's school may not have taught the expression of a c u l t u r a l statement, but upon J a r v i s ' r e t u r n from the s c h o o l , he painted s o c i a l r e a l i s t i c works. I t i s not u n t i l the l a t e f i f t i e s t hat h i s p a i n t i n g s depict the a r t i s t himself and the i n f l u e n c e of Hofmann.

The purpose of p a i n t i n g as the c u l m i n a t i o n of experience to that moment was expressed by Hofmann and J a r v i s . This experience i s p i c t o r i a l l y communicated t o the observer by the p a i n t i n g . L i k e a radio-broadcaster,

63

the p a i n t e r does not know to whom he w i l l communicate. J a r v i s however d i f f e r s s l i g h t l y from Hofmann by saying that the p a i n t i n g does not have to communicate t o the observer what the a r t i s t i s expressing. Hofmann's o p t i m i s t i c outlook f e l t t h a t i n time the audience would perceive what he wished to communicate.

Both Donald J a r v i s and Hans Hofmann are teachers. They f e l t t h a t p a i n t i n g cannot be taught t o the person who has not that c e r t a i n g i f t of s e n s i t i v i t y . J a r v i s f u r t h e r extends the l i m i t s of teaching. He s a i d that one can teach a student about p a i n t i n g ; that i s mixing c o l o r s and priming. However, the teacher's greatest and

J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966.

Page 126: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

119

most i m p o r t a n t t a s k i s t o " t u r n s t u d e n t s o n " ^ 4 much i n

the same way as Hofmann s t i m u l a t e d h i s s t u d e n t s t o c r e a t e

by h i s s t r o n g c r i t i c a l approach and v i b r a n t p e r s o n a l i t y .

Whereas Hofmann d i s c u s s e d t e a c h i n g a r t t o some e x t e n t i n

many a r t i c l e s , J a r v i s l a t e r f e l t t h a t " t h e q u e s t i o n of Ac

t e a c h i n g a r t i s t o o g e n e r a l t o w a r r a n t an answer." y

The a c t u a l t a s k of t e a c h i n g has t a k e n t i m e and

energy f r o m b o t h Hofmann and J a r v i s . J a r v i s f e e l s t h a t

s t u d e n t c o n t a c t added t o h i s own work i n t h e sense of

s t i m u l a t i o n and i d e a s . Hofmann, however, n e v e r s a i d t h a t

s t u d e n t s e v e r a i d e d the development o f h i s own work; he t

was a s e p a r a t e e n t i t y i n New York and was h e l d i n awe by

h i s p u p i l s . I n c o n t r a s t , J a r v i s i s more down t o e a r t h and

c o n v e r s e s more w i t h h i s s t u d e n t s .

J a r v i s 1 c o n v e r s a b i l i t y has e n a b l e d him t o become

more p e r s o n a l l y a c q u a i n t e d w i t h h i s s t u d e n t s because of

the s m a l l e r c l a s s e s and t h e h i g h s c h o o l - l i k e approach of

t h e Vancouver A r t S c h o o l . Through h i s t e a c h i n g J a r v i s

f e e l s t h a t h i s thought f o r c e r t a i n problems have been

c l a r i f i e d . T h i s s t atement i s r e f l e c t e d i n Hofmann's 1915

P r o s p e c t u s where he s a i d t h a t t h e s c h o o l would c l a r i f y

t h e whole new p i c t o r i a l a p proach t o modern a r t . Hofmann

o b t a i n e d t h e b a s i s o f h i s t h e o r i e s from h i s P a r i s s t a y 6 4 J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1 9 6 6 .

6 5 J a r v i s , Feb. 1 , 1 9 6 6 .

Page 127: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

(1904 - 1914) and resolved them from h i s own approach. His teaching n e c e s s i t a t e d o r g a n i z i n g a coherent theory f o r h i s students and d i s c u s s i n g i t w i t h them. While Hofmann never s t a t e d that h i s students aided h i s develop ment, "teaching helps to c l a r i f y ; that i s the v i r t u e of te a c h i n g . " The teacher must be w i l l i n g t o l i s t e n t o h i s students and avoid a l l dogmatism. Hofmann had such a p e r s o n a l i t y . I t s r e s u l t s can be seen i n h i s many students. Each had an i n d i v i d u a l r e a c t i o n t o h i s teach^ ings. J a r v i s a l s o has a sympathetic a t t i t u d e towards h i students. He leads them i n t h e i r chosen d i r e c t i o n . He r e a l i z e s t h a t a b s t r a c t expressionism means nothing t o h i s young students so he approaches them with hard edge, Op and Pop a r t .

Hofmann taught h i s students a c e r t a i n f i n a l end i n p a i n t i n g which the student was not forced to accept. J a r v i s as a true student of Hofmann reacted p a r t i a l l y f o r some of those teachings. He f e e l s that "Hofmann*s ideas are v a l i d f o r some ( a r t i s t s ) . Hofmann got people r o l l i n g " t o e s t a b l i s h t h e i r own p a r t i c u l a r d i r e c t i o n . Hofmann's a f f e c t on Canadian a r t i s i n d i r e c t because i t has been i n f l u e n c e d by the whole New York School of

6 6 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, .1966. 6 7 J a r v i s , Feb. 8, 1966.

Page 128: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

121 68

A b s t r a c t Expressionism. However, i n J a r v i s * work i t i s p o s s i b l e t o see a

r e l a t i o n s h i p between teacher and p u p i l . J a r v i s d i d not take over Hofmann*s id e a s , but worked them out according t o h i s own p e r s o n a l i t y and from a r e a c t i o n t o h i s environment.

Upon J a r v i s * r e t u r n from the Hofmann s c h o o l , he painted i n a s o c i a l r e a l i s t i c manner. S o l i t a r y f i g u r e s were i s o l a t e d i n a crowd. The dark and muddy c o l o r s take on a depressing atmosphere. Line i s used t o d e f i n e planes. This e a r l y period of h i s work does not show J a r v i s at h i s maturity of the ideas derived from Hofmann. The subject expresses the p l i g h t of humanity which he l a t e r d i s r e g a r d s . His use of c o l o r shows nothing of the v i t a l i t y and excitement that Hofmann had already e x h i b i t e d . I t i s i n the l a t e r works such as "Winter Evening" that J a r v i s uses h i s experience of the Hofmann school t o express h i s f e e l i n g and sentiments about the n a t u r a l landscape and flora,,, of the West Coast. "Winter Evening", ( p l a t e V I I I ) as i n Hofmann*s works, does not depict a n a t u r a l landscape, but a f e e l ­i n g i n t o nature p i c t o r i a l l y r e a l i z e d . The e f f e c t of nature on J a r v i s i s the r e a l s u b j e c t , t h e r e f o r e o b j e c t ­i v e r e a l i t y cannot be seen c l e a r l y . One can however p i c k out a t r e e - l i k e form, a man w i t h h i s arms out-

__ u o J a r v i s , Feb. 1, 1966.

Page 129: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

122 s t r e t c h e d and a p a r t i a l c i t y s c a p e . What J a r v i s f e e l s about the West Coast i s suggested t o the viewer. The oranges and the browns create a warm and enchanting f e e l i n g . Blue and white normally appear c o o l but here J a r v i s has juxtaposed i t t o the warm mauve and added pink and mauve t o the blue and white so that the r e s u l t i s an o v e r a l l warmness. The p a i n t has been a p p l i e d i n a planar concept w i t h each brushstroke a planar u n i t . Although one could say that there are short dark l i n e s t o the lower l e f t and r i g h t , these are i n f a c t the r e f l e c t i o n of the base c o l o r coming through the l i n e a r planes of white. Because the ground has not been t o t a l l y concealed l e v e l s of p i c t o r i a l depth have been achieved. Each brushstroke has been a p p l i e d w i t h a verve and a v i r t u o s i t y t h a t i s reminicent of o r i e n t a l c a l l i g r a p h y . The strokes are sweeping and are done w i t h an o r i e n t a l assuredness. Because the brush i s not loaded w i t h pigment, the c o l o r of the ground comes through the white and the r e s u l t takes on the appear­ance of " f l y i n g white" i n the negative. However, i n c o n t r a s t t o the o r i e n t a l c a l l i g r a p h i c brush, the equal w i d t h of each brushstroke, as the planar u n i t , i s used i n combination t o form l a r g e r u n i t s such as the s k y l i n e ­l i k e shape to the upper l e f t and the o v e r l a i d white which creates the e f f e c t of snow.

Page 130: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

1 2 3 Upon f i r s t glance, the canvas i s f l a t and l a c k s

any r e a l depth except f o r a s l i g h t depression i n the top blue area. Focusing on the lower white area, the mauve and blue upper area recedes while the orange and brown-like f i g u r e p r o j e c t s . Reversing the focus t o the f i g u r e , the brown and orange t r e e - l i k e shape pro­j e c t s and the white recedes, thereby c r e a t i n g a dynamic e f f e c t of "push and p u l l . " E q u i l i b r i u m i s a t t a i n e d , however, by the o v e r a l l l u m i n o s i t y of the canvas.

The three sectioned composition can be compared t o Hofmann*s "Above Deep Waters," but J a r v i s has created a more o v e r a l l e f f e c t of c o l o r i n s t e a d of Hofmann's segmented areas. The c r u c i f o r m - l i k e shape to the center creates a breathing surface of c o n t r a c t ­i n g and expanding f o r c e s . The lower p o r t i o n of white which i s separated by the stem of the cruciform tends t o u n i f y the base of the canvas and to contract i t . The stem however has the p r o j e c t i v e c o l o r of orange and the warmth of the brown to separate the white areas and expand p e r p e n d i c u l a r l y and h o r i z o n t a l l y o f f the canvas. J a r v i s , then, has created the simultaneous e f f e c t of "push and p u l l " and expansion and c o n t r a c t i o n as Hofmann would have.

These f o r c e s have been used t o create a p e r c e i v -a b l y p u l s a t i n g and l i v i n g canvas. The areas of white ove r l a y the l u s h brown below l i k e snow over f r e s h l y

Page 131: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

1 2 4 t i l l e d s o i l . The snow breaks and l i f e springs f o r t h w i t h j u b i l a n t outstretched arms. J a r v i s has captured the e f f e c t of Nature on man i n B r i t i s h Columbia. The contrast of seasons i s seen i n the contrast of the warm white and mellow tepidness of the orange and brown. J a r v i s ' empath­i z i n g i n t o nature has enabled him to depict i t s c r e a t i v e r o l e . The sweep of the brush suggests the movement of t r e e s and the energy surrounding o b j e c t i v e r e a l i t y . In "Winters Evening" J a r v i s has been able to capture nature i n r i c h f u l l c o l o r s and to r e f l e c t growth and l i f e by suggestive shapes and forms. He has employed the means taught by Hofmann and used them i n h i s own personal way t o d e p i c t h i s experience of the n a t u r a l landscape of B r i t i s h Columbia.

The three West-Coast Canadian a r t i s t s , Donald J a r v i s , Takao Tanabe, and L i o n e l Thomas, attended Hofmann's School of Art and have been a f f e c t e d by him. Thomas's two and a h a l f month stay at the Provincetown summer school enabled him to understand Hofmann's t h e o r i e s and teaching methods. Because of the s i m i l a r i t i e s of t h e i r p e r s o n a l i t i e s and the added f e r v o u r of Thomas' enthusiasm f o r Hofmann's t h e o r i e s , p r e s e n t l y L i o n e l Thomas teaches as Hofmann had taught before. Hofmann's t h e o r i e s are employed as are other masters of the t w e n t i e t h century.

Page 132: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

125 Takao Tanabe's p e r s o n a l i t y d i f f e r s from both

Hofmann"s and Thomas". His quiet and i n t r o v e r t e d a t t i t u d e t o l i f e has or appears t o have no room f o r Hofmann*s t h e o r i e s . Tanabe f e e l s that h i s a r t has been self-developed. He does not accord r e c o g n i t i o n t o h i s teachers which undoubtedly have a f f e c t e d him. His short s i x week d u r a t i o n at the Hofmann school could account f o r h i s l a c k of enthusiasm for•Hofmann"s t h e o r i e s .

Don J a r v i s ' r e a c t i o n to the Hofmann school f a l l s n e i t h e r i n t o t o t a l acceptance as Thomas or t o t a l r e j e c t ­i o n as Tanabe. J a r v i s , as a t r u e student of the Hofmann sch o o l , has understood Hofmann's t h e o r i e s and from them worked and developed h i s own approach as Hofmann had done f i f t y years e a r l i e r i n P a r i s . J a r v i s ' s i x month stay at the school allowed him t o be acquainted w i t h Hofmann's i d e a l s and at the same time to develop h i s own t h e o r i e s . These t h e o r i e s were not resolved t o t a l l y by the time J a r v i s a r r i v e d home, but r a t h e r took years of work and development i n h i s p a i n t i n g s t o achieve the d e s i r e d end. J a r v i s , as a teacher i n h i s own r i g h t , now i s i n the p o s i t i o n t o a f f e c t h i s students as Hofmann a f f e c t e d J a r v i s eighteen years e a r l i e r . His students are not taught s p e c i f i c formulas and methods, but r a t h e r each student i s lead to the f u l f i l l m e n t of h i s own development.

Hans Hofmann's a f f e c t i s not l i m i t e d to a r t i s t s f o r such w r i t e r s as A l l a n Leepa, Sheldon Cheney and E r i e

Page 133: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

126 Loran have w r i t t e n books concerning c e r t a i n aspects of modern a r t and a l l have acknowledged t h e i r debt t o him f o r h i s concept and approach t o a r t . D i r e c t i n f l u e n c e from Hofmann has now ended since the t e r m i n a t i o n of h i s t e a c h i n g career i n 1958 and h i s death only t h i s year. I n d i r e c t i n f l u e n c e , however, i s s t i l l being f e l t because h i s students and second generation students are t r a n s ­m i t t i n g h i s ideas to the new generation of young a r t i s t s . While a b s t r a c t expressionism i s no longer i n the f o r e ­f r o n t of the a r t w o r l d , Hofmann's ideas are s t i l l v a l i d . He d i d not teach a c e r t a i n unrefutable formula f o r the c r e a t i o n of a work of a r t but r a t h e r the b a s i s of a work of a r t and the c r e a t i v e process. These ideas are not the d e f i n i t i v e w r i t i n g s on the c r e a t i o n of a work of a r t but r a t h e r Hofmann expected each i n d i v i d u a l a r t i s t t o develop from such concepts as he himself had done. With t h i s backlog of i n f o r m a t i o n , and an inborn a r t i s t i c s e n s i t i v i t y , the a r t i s t i s t o evolve the canvas from a f l a t and l i f e ­l e s s surface t o one i n which the observer perceives the a r t i s t ' s l i f e , time and experience. The s p i r i t that the a r t i s t captures i s a non-physical e n t i t y , but yet a l i v i n g r e a l i t y d e r i v e d from the a r t i s t .

That s p i r i t i n a work of a r t i s synonymous w i t h i t s q u a l i t y . The r e a l i n a r t never d i e s because i t s nature i s predominantly s p i r i t u a l . 6 9

Hans Hofmann, Search f o r the R e a l , 1948, p. 54•

Page 134: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

PLATE I

"Fantasia,* 1 1943, by Hans Hofmann, U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a , Berkeley.

PLATE I I

"Effervescence," 1944, by Hans Hofmann U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a , Berkeley.

Page 135: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

"Le G i l o t i n , " 1953, by Hans Hofmann, U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a , Berkeley.

Page 136: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

PLATE V

"Above Deep Waters," 1959, by Hans Hofmann U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a , Berkeley.

PLATE VI "Pre-Dawn," I960, by Hans Hofmann, C o l l e c t i o n of Mr. P r e n t i s C. Hale, San F r a n c i s c o .

Page 137: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

130

PLATE VII

"Landscape of an I n t e r i o r P l a c e , " 1955, by Takao Tanabe, N a t i o n a l G a l l e r y of Canada, Ottawa.

PLATE V I I I "Winter Evening," 1958, by Donald J a r v i s , Unknown c o l l e c t i o n .

Page 138: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

131

BIBLIOGRAPHY

I. WRITINGS BY HANS HOFMANN

Cal i f o r n i a . University. Haviland H a l l . Hans Hofmann Exhibition Catalogue, Aug. 5-22, 1931. Berkeley: University of C a l i f o r n i a , 1931.

Hofmann, Hans. "The Color Problem i n Pure Painting." 1955, c i t e d i n Wight, Frederick S., Hans Hofmann, Berkeley: University of C a l i f o r n i a Press, 1957.

. "From 'It I s ' , " 1959, c i t e d i n Los Angeles, County Art Museum. New York School, The F i r s t Generation Paintings of 1940's and 1950's. Los Angeles: Board of the Los Angeles County Art Museum, 1965, pp. 17-18.

"Hans Hofmann Explains His Painting.:" Bennington Alumnae Quarterly, Vol. 7, F a l l , 1955, p. 23.

"Hans Hofmann On Art." The Art Journal, Vol. 22, No, 3, p. 180. . "Munich School Prospectus, 1915," c i t e d i n S e i t z ,

William G., Hans Hofmann. New York: Museum of Modern Art, 1963, p. 56.

"Mystery of Creative Relations," 1953, c i t e d i n Hofmann, Hans and Sam Hunter, Hans Hofmann. New York: Harry N. Abrams, Inc., 1963, p. 45.

"Nature and Art: Controversy and Misconception," c i t e d i n Sammuel Kootz Gallery, New York. New Paint­ings by Hans Hofmann, Jan. 7 to 25, 1958. New York: Sammuel Kootz Gallery, 1958, no paging.

_ . "On the Aims of Art," Fortnightly, Vol. 1, No. 13 , February 26 , 1932, pp. 7-TTT

. "Painting and Culture," Fortnightly, Vol. 1, No. 1, September 11, 1931, pp. 5-7.

_ . " P l a s t i c Creation," 1932, c i t e d i n Hofmann, Hans and Sam Hunter, Hans Hofmann. New York: Harry N. Abrams, Inc., 1963, pp. 35-38.

"Reply to questionnaire and comments on a recent e x h i b i t i o n , " Arts and Architecture, Vol. 66, No. 11, November, 1949, pp. 22-28.

Page 139: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

132 . "The R e s u r r e c t i o n of the P l a s t i c A r t s , " 1953,

c i t e d i n Hofmann, Hans and Sam Hunter, Hans Hofmann. New York: Harry N. Abrams, 1963, p. 44.

. Search f o r the Real and other Essays. Andover, Mass.: The Addison G a l l e r y of American A r t , 1948. . "Space P i c t o r i a l l y R e a l i z e d through the I n t r i n s i c

F a c u l t y of Color t o Express Volumes," c i t e d i n Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , New York, Hans Hofmann E x h i b i ­t i o n Catalogue, Nov. 13-Dec. 1, 1951. New York: Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , 1951, no paging. . "A Statement by Hans Hofmann, c i t e d i n Sammuel

Kootz G a l l e r y , New York, Hans Hofmann E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue. Oct. 28-Nov. 22, 1952. New York: Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , 1952, no paging.

I l l i n o i s . U n i v e r s i t y , College of Fine and Applied A r t s . U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary American P a i n t i n g , March 4- A p r i l 15, 1951. Urbana: U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o u s , 1951, pp. 187-188. . U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary

American P a i n t i n g , March 2 - A p n l 13, 1952. Urbana: U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 1952, p. 199. . U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary

American P a i n t i n g , March 1 - A p r i l 12, 1953. Urbana: U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 1953, pp. 189-190. . U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary

American P a i n t i n g , Feb. 2 7 - A p r i l , 8, 1955. Urbana: U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 1955, pp. 207-208. . U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary

American P a i n t i n g , March 1 - A p r i l 5, 1959. Urbana! U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 1959, p. 206. . U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary

American P a i n t i n g , Feb. 2 0 - A p r i l 2, 1961. Urbana: U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 1961, p. 116. . U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s E x h i b i t i o n of Contemporary

American P a i n t i n g . March 3 - A p r i l 7, 1963. Urbana" U n i v e r s i t y of I l l i n o i s , 1963, p. 86.

Kuh, Katherine. The A r t i s t ' s Voice. New York: Harper and Row 1962, pp. 118-129.

Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , New York. Hans Hofmann E x h i b i t i o n Catalogue. Jan. 5-23, I960. New York: Sammuel Kootz G a l l e r y , I960.

Page 140: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

133

I I . BOOKS

American Abstract A r t i s t s , ed't. The World of Abstract A r t . New York: George Wittenborn, Inc., 1957. . Art Since 1945. New York: Harry N. Abrams, I n c . ,

T956\

Ashton, Dore. The Unknown Shore. Boston: L i t t l e , Brown and Company, 1962.

B a r r , A l f r e d H., J r . Matisse: His Art and His P u b l i c . New York: The Museum of Modern A r t , 1951.

Ble s h , Rudi. Modern A r t , U.S.A.: Men, R e b e l l i o n , Conquest. 1900-1956. New York: A l f r e d A. Knopf. 1956.

Brooks, Leonard. P a i n t i n g and Understanding Abstract A r t ; an Approach t o Contemporary Methods. New York: Reinhold Pub. Corp., 1964.

Canaday, John. Embattled C r i t i c . New York: F a r r a r , Straus and Company, 1963.

Cheney, Sheldon. Expressionism i n A r t . New York: L i v e r i g h t Pub. Corp., 1958. . A Primer of Modern A r t . New York: Tudor P u b l i s h ­

in g Company, 1947. . The Story of Modern A r t . New York: The V i k i n g

Press, 1945. Dorra, Henri. The American Muse. New York: The V i k i n g Press,

1961. G e l d z a h l e r , Henry. American P a i n t i n g i n the Twentieth Cen­

t u r y . New York: The M e t r o p o l i t a n Museum of A r t , 1965. Goodrich, Loyd and Baur, John I . American Art of our Century.

New York: Whitney Museum of A r t , 1961. Green berg, Clement. Art and C u l t u r e . Boston: Beacon Pr e s s ,

1961. . Hofmann. P a r i s : George F a l l , 1961.

Haftmann, Werner. P a i n t i n g i n the Twentieth Century. London: Lund Humphries, I960.

Page 141: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

134

Heath, A d r i a n . A b s t r a c t P a i n t i n g s , I t s O r i g i n and Meaning. London: A. T i r a n t i , 1953.

Henning, Edward B. Paths of A b s t r a c t A r t . C l e v e l a n d : C l e v e l a n d Museum of A r t , I960.

Hess, Thomas B. A b s t r a c t P a i n t i n g . New York: The V i k i n g P ress, 1951.

Hofmann, Hans and Hunter, Sam. Hans Hofmann. New York: Harry N. Abrams, Inc., 1%3.

Hubbard, Robert Hamilton. An Anthology of Canadian A r t . Toronto: Oxford U n i v e r s i t y P r e s s , I960.

. The Development of Canadian A r t . Ottawa: N a t i o n a l G a l l e r y of Canada, 1963.

Hunter, Sam. Modern American P a i n t i n g and S c u l p t u r e . New York: D e l l P u b l i s h i n g Co., Inc., 1959.

J a n i s , Sidney. A b s t r a c t and S u r r e a l i s t A r t i n America. New York: Reynal and H i t c h c o c k , 1944.

Kandinsky, W a s s i l y . Concerning the S p i r i t u a l i n A r t and P a i n t i n g i n P a r t i c u l a r (1912). New York: W i t t e n b o r n T

S c h u l t z , Inc., 1947.

Loran, E r i e . Recent G i f t s and Loans of P a i n t i n g s by Hans Hofmann. Ber k e l e y : The Regents o f the U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a , 1964.

McCurdy, C h a r l e s . Modern A r t , a P i c t o r i a l Anthology. New York: The MacMillan Company, 1958.

McNairn, Ian. 7 West Coast P a i n t e r s . Vancouver: Vancouver I n t e r n a t i o n a l F e s t i v a l , 1959.

Mendelowitz, D a n i e l Marcus. A H i s t o r y of American A r t . New York: H o l t , R einhart and Winston, I960.

New York, Museum of Modern A r t . Cubism and A b s t r a c t A r t . New York: The Museum o f Modern A r t , 1936.

Nordness, Lee. A r t U.S.A. Now, V o l . 1. New York: The V i k i n g P r e s s , 1957".

Pepper, Stephen Coburn. World Hypotheses, a Study i n Evidence. B e r k e l e y : U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a P r e s s ,

Read, Herbert. A Concise H i s t o r y o f Modern P a i n t i n g . New York: F r e d e r i c k A. Praeger, 1964 [1959].

Page 142: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

135

Richardson, Edgar P r e s t o n . P a i n t i n g i n America, from 1 5 0 2 to. the Present. New York: C r o w e l l , 1 9 6 5 .

R i t c h i e , Andrew Carnduff. A b s t r a c t P a i n t i n g and S c u l p t u r e i n America. New York: The Museum of Modern A r t , 1 9 5 1 .

Rosenberg, Harold. The Anxious Object. New York: Horizon Pr e s s , 196/f.

. The T r a d i t i o n o f the New. New York: H o r i z o n P r e s s ,

Rosenblum, Robert. Cubism and Twentieth-Century A r t . New York: Abrams, 1 9 6 1 .

S e i t z , W i l l i a m C. Hans Hofmann. New York: Museum of Modern A r t , 1 9 6 3 .

Seuphor, M i c h a e l . A b s t r a c t P a i n t i n g . New York: D e l l P u b l i s h ­i n g Co., Inc., 1964 [ 1 9 6 1 ] .

. D i c t i o n a r y of A b s t r a c t P a i n t i n g . New York: P a r i s Book Center, Inc., 1957 .

S n a i t h , W i l l i a m . The I r r e s p o n s i b l e A r t s . New York: Atheneum, 1964 .

Soby, James T h r o i l . Contemporary P r i n t e r s . New York: The Museum of Modern A r t .

S p i l l e r , J i i r g . Paul K l e e : the T h i n k i n g Eye. New York: George Wittenborn, 1 9 6 1 .

Time, the weekly news-magazine. Three Hundred Years o f American P a i n t i n g . New York: Time, Inc., j > 9 5 7 .

Wight, F r e d e r i c k S. Hans Hofmann. Berkeley: U n i v e r s i t y of C a l i f o r n i a P r e s s , 1957 .

I I I . PERIODICALS, EXHIBITION CATALOGUES AND PERSONAL INTERVIEWS

"The Age of Experiment." Time, V o l . LXVII, No. 7 , February 1 3 , 1 9 5 6 , pp. 6 2 - 6 7 .

Angunes, Raphael. "The Second I n t e r American B i e n n i a l o f Mexico." Antes de Mexico, V o l . 6 , No. 3 4 , 1 9 6 1 , p. 23.

"Art News of America; Andover Surveys and A b s t r a c t i o n i s t . " A r t News, V o l . X L V i i , No. 1 , March, 1 9 4 8 , p. 1 1 .

Page 143: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

136

"Art News V i s i t s the Art Schools; Three i n Provincetown." Art News, Vol. XLV, No. 4 , June, 1946, pp. 12-13.

Ashton, Doreo. "Hofmann Reaffirms." The Art Digest, Vol. 27, No. 3, November, 1952, pp. 16̂ 17̂ . "New York Commentary." The Studio, Vol. 166,

No. 848, December, 1963, p. 232+.

. "La Section Americanne." XXe S i e c l e , Vol. 22, No. 14, Juin, I960, no paging.

"Book Shelf; 'Search f o r the Real'." Art News, Vol. X L V 1 1 , No. 9, January, 1949, P- 10.

Boux, Rene. "An A r t i s t Relates his S k i l l s to Architecture." Canadian Art, Vol. 13, No. 1, Autumn, 1955, pp. 203-203":

. "The Mural as a Ballet i n Paint." Canadian Art, Vol. 11, No. 1 Autumn, 1953, pp. 27-287

Breeskin, Adelyn. "Trois Peintres Americans." L' O e i l, No. 6 7 - 6 8 , J u i l l e t - A o u t , i 9 6 0 , pp. 54-59-

Bultmann, F r i t z . "The Achievements of Hans Hofmann." Art News, Vol. 62, No. 5, September, 1963, pp. 43-454.

Campbell, Larry. "Hans Hofmann [Kootz; to Nov. 2 2 ] . " Art News, Vol. 51, No. 7, part 1, November, 1952, p. 44 .

. "Hans Hofmann [Kootz: to May 1 7 ] . " Art News, Vol. 53, No. 3 , May, 1953, p. 44 .

Canada, National Gallery. Jarvis and Kiyooka. Ottawa: National Gallery of Canada (undated).

. Robert and Sonia Delaunay. Ottawa: National Gallery of Canada, 1965.

Claus, Jurgen. "Hans Hofmann's D i a l e c t i c a l Pictures." Sya, No. 2, 1966, pp. 33-40.

"Coast to Coast i n Art: A r t i s t Designs f o r Zoo." Canadian Art, Vol. 12, No.2, winter, 1955, p. 81.

"Coast to Coast i n Art: Donald Ja r v i s i n a One Man Show." Canadian Art, Vol. 7, No. 3, Spring, 1950, p. 115.

"Coast to Coast i n Art: Vancouver Painter Wins Inter­national Award." Canadian Art, Vol. 9 , No. 4 , Summer, 1952, p. TW*

Page 144: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

137

Coates, Robert M. "The Art G a l l e r i e s . " The New Yorker, Vol. XLI, No. 2, February 27 , 196$, p. 100.

. "At Home and Abroad." The New Yorker, Vol. XXII, No. 7, March 3 0 , 1946, pp. 75-76.

. "A Hans Hofmann Retrospective." The New Yorker, v o l . 3 3 , May 11, 1957, pp. 103-105.

"Donald J a r v i s . " New Design Gallery Press Release. Vancouver, Nov. 13 , lW*~.

E l l i o t , Eugene Clinton. "Some Recent Conceptions of Color Theory." Journal of Aesthetics, Vol. 18, No. 4 , June I 9 6 0 , pp. 502-503.

Faison, S. Lane, J r . "Art." The Nation, Vol. 180, No. 26 , June 2 5 , 1955, pp. 589-590.

Farber, Manny. "Art." The Nation, Vol. 171, No. 19, November 4 , 1950, pp. 445-446.

Feinstein, Sam. "Early Hofmann Landscapes." The Art Digest, Vol. 27 , No. 15, May 1, 1953, p. 16.

. "H. H." ci t e d i n Sammuel Kootz Gallery, New York. Hans Hofmann Catalogue, A p r i l 27-May 2 0 , 1953, New York: Sammuel Kootz Gallery, 1953.

"Fifty-Seventh Street i n Review; Hans Hofmann, Extrovert." The Art Digest, Vol. 21, No. 13 , A p r i l , 1947, p. 20.

Fitzsimmons, James. "Hans Hofmann." Everyday Art Quarterly, No. 2 8 , 1953, pp. 23-26.

. "Hofmann V i t a l at 7 1 . " The Art Digest, Vol. 26 ,

No. 4 , Nov. 15, 1951, P. IT. . "Hofmann*s Nature." The Art Digest, Vol. 25 , No. 3 ,

November, 1950, p. 17.

Franklin, Stephen. "Busy A r t i s t . " Weekend Magazine, Vol. 8 , No. 2, 1958, pp. 12-14.

Fremantle, Christopher E. "New York Commentary." The Studio, Vol. 149, No. 743, February, 1955, p. 57.

Fried, Michael. "Jackson Pollack." Artforum, Vol. 14, No. 1, Sept., 1965, pp. 14-17.

Fulford, Robert. "D.A. J a r v i s . " Canadian Art, Vol. 13 , No. 1, January/February, 1961, pp. 28-29.

Page 145: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

138

. "Tanabe." Canadian Art. Vol. 18, No. 1, Jan./Feb., T961, pp. 50-JT.

Getlein, Frank. "The Missing Link." The New Republic. Vol. 136, No. 25, June 24, 1957, p. 21 .

Greenberg, Clement. "American-type Painting." Partisan Review, Vol. 22 , No. 2, Spring, 1955, pp. 179-1967

. "Art." The Nation, Vol. 160, No. 16, A p r i l 2 1 ,

1945, p. kW. . "Hans Hofmann: grand old re b e l . " Art News, Vol. 57,

No. 9 , January, 1959, pp. 26-29.

. "Hofmann's Early Abstract Paintings." c i t e d i n Sammuel Kootz Gallery, New York. Hans Hofmann Catalogue Jan. 6-17, 2 0 - 3 1 , 1959. New York: Sammuel Kootz Gallery, 1959.

. "The Present Prospects of American Painting and S c u l p t u r e . " Horizon, No. 9 3 - 4 , October, 1947, pp. 20-30.

Grossberg, Jacob. "In the G a l l e r i e s . " Arts Magazine. Vol. 3 9 , No. 5, A p r i l , 1965, p. 57.

Grossee, Maurice. "Art." The Nation, Vol. 184, No. 21 , May 25, 1957, pp. 464-465.

"Hans Hofmann." Art Digest, Vol. 2 8 , No. 4 , November 15 , 1953, p. T.

"Hans Hofmann." The Art Digest. Vol. 29 , No. 5 , Dec. 1, 1954, p.

"Hans Hofmann." Arts Magazine, Vol. 3 5 , No. 7, A p r i l , 1961, p. 58.

"Hans Hofmann at 8 8 . " Newsweek. Vol. LXII, No. 12 , September, 1963, p. 88.

"Hans Hofmann Continues Despite the War." The Art Digest, Vol. 16, No. 16, May 15, 1942, p. 29.

"Hans Hofmann G i f t to the University of C a l i f o r n i a at Berkeley." The Art Journal, Vol. 2 3 , No. r , Summer, 1964, p. 291.

"Hans Hofmann, Teacher-Artist." The Art Digest. Vol. 18. No. 12 , March 15, 1944, p. 13.

"Hans Hofmann w i l l exhibit o i l paintings." Arts A l l i a n c e Bul­l e t i n , Vol. 34 , No. 6 , March, 1956, p. 54.

Page 146: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

139

H a r r i s o n , Jane. "In the G a l l e r i e s . " A r t s Magazine, V o l . 3 8 , No. 5, A p r i l , 1964, p. 29.

Hart, W i l l i a m S. Interviews w i t h the w r i t e r , 1965-1966.

. "Theory and P r a c t i c e of Abstract A r t . " c i t e d i n Canada, N a t i o n a l G a l l e r y . Lawren H a r r i s : Retro­s p e c t i v e E x h i b i t i o n , 1963. Ottawa: N a t i o n a l G a l l e r y of Canada, 1963.

Hess, Thomas B. "Hans Hofmann's [Kootz: t o Nov. 1 3 ] . " Art News, V o l . XLIX, No. 7, part 1, November, 1950, pp. 47-48.

Hess, Thomas H. "The Mystery of Hans Hofmann." Art News, V o l . 6 3 , No. 10, February, 1965, p. 39 .

Hofmann, Hans, and Hunter, Sam. Hans Hofmann. New York: Harry N. Abrams, Inc., 1963•

"Hofmann at Chouinard." The Art Digest, V o l . 5, No. 10, February 15, 1931, p. 29-

"Hofmann i n P a r i s . " The Art Digest, V o l . 23, No. 7, Jan­uary 1, 1949, p. 10.

"Hofmann P r o f i l e . " The Art Digest, V o l . 25 , May 15, 1951, pp. 6-7 .

"In Intimate Media." The Art D i g e s t , " V o l . 25 , No. 16, May 15, 1951, p. 22.

"In the G a l l e r i e s . " A r t s , V o l . 3 3 , No. 5, February, 1959, p. 56.

"In the G a l l e r i e s ; Hans Hofmann." A r t s , V o l . 3 0 , No. 3 , December, 1955, p. 53.

"In the G a l l e r i e s ; Hans Hofmann." A r t s , V o l . 32 , No.5, February, 1958, p. 524.

J a f f e , Dr. H.L.C. Interview w i t h the w r i t e r . :.2S'£February, 1966.

J a r v i s , Donald. Interviews w i t h the w r i t e r . February, I966. Kaufmann, Betty. "Hans Hofmann." The Commonweal, V o l . 79,

No. 7, November 8 , I963, pp. 205-206. Kees, Weldon. "Werber and Hofmann." P a r t i s a n Review, V o l .

XVI, No. 5 , May, 1949, pp. 541-543.

Page 147: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

140 Kepes, George. "Review of Hans Hofmann's 'Search f o r the

Real ' . " Magazine of A r t , V o l . 45, No. 3, March, 1952, pp. 136-137.

de Koonig, E l a i n e . "Hans Hofmann P a i n t s a P i c t u r e . " Art News, V o l . X L V I I I , No. 10, February, 1950, pp*TT8-41.

K o z l o f f , Max. "The Problem of C o l o r - L i g h t i n Rothko." A r t -Fprum, V o l . IV, No. 1, Sept., 1965, pp. 38-44.

Krapow, A l l a n . "The E f f e c t of Recent Art upon the Teaching of A r t . " The Art J o u r n a l , V o l . 23, No. 2, w i n t e r , 1963-64, pp. 136-138.

K r o l l , Jack. "Some Greenberg C i r c l e s . " Art News, V o l . 61, No. 1, March, 1962, p. 35.

L i e d e r , P h i l i p . "The New York School i n Los Angeles." Art Forum, V o l . IV, No. 1, Sept., 1965, pp. 3-13.

Los Angeles. County Art Museum. New York School, The F i r s t Generation. P a i n t i n g s of 1940's and 1950's. Los Angeles, Board of the Los Angeles County A r t Museum, 1965.

Lowndes, Joan. "Coast t o Coast i n A r t : Takao Tanabe at the New Design G a l l e r y . " Canadian A r t , V o l . 18, No. 4, July/August, 1961, p. 267. . "Don J a r v i s at the New Design G a l l e r y , Vancouver."

Canadian A r t , V o l . 20, No. 1, January/February, 1963, p. 10.

McNairn, Ian. "Present D i r e c t i o n s at the Vancouver Art Gal­l e r y . " Canadian A r t , V o l . 19, No. 3, May/June, 1962, p. 176.

"The Making of A r t i s t s . " Newsweek, V o l . XLIX, No. 17, A p r i l 19, 1957, p.~6"8~;

"A Master Teacher." L i f e , V o l . 42, No. 14, A p r i l 8, 1957, pp. 70-73.

Munro, Eleanor C. "Hans Hofmann [ K o o t z ] . " Art News, V o l . 56, No. 10, February, 1958, p. 10. . "Hans Hofmann [Kootz]. Art News, V o l . 62, No. 2,

A p r i l , 1963, p. 10. "Nebraska Announces Annual Purchase." The Art Digest, Vol.25,

No. 15, May 1, 1951, p. 13.

Page 148: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

141 Norse, John D. "He Paints Big." Art i n America, No. 2, I960,

pp. 76-78. Oeri, Georgine. "The Object of Art." Quadrum, No. 16, 1964,

pp. 8-11. "The Passing Shows; Hans Hofmann." Art News, Vol. XLIII,

No. 3, March 15 - 3 1 , 1944, p.~20~.

"The Passing Shows, Hans Hofmann." Art News, Vol. XLIX, No. 5, A p r i l 15 - 3 0 , 1945, p .~6^

"The Passing Shows; Hans Hofmann." Art News, Vol. XLV, No. 1, March, 1946, p. 53.

Plaskett, Joe. "Some New Canadians Painters and t h e i r Debt to Hans Hofmann." Canadian Art, Vol. X, No. 2, Winter, 1953, pp. 59-63-

Porter, F a i r f i e l d . "Hans Hofmann [Kootz: Nov. 13-Dec. 1 ] . " Art News, Vol. 50, No. 7, November, 1951, p. 46.

. "Hans Hofmann [Kootz: to Dec. 1 2 ] . " Art News, Vol. 53, No. 8, December, 1953, p. 41.

P o l l e t , Elizabeth. "In the G a l l e r i e s , Hans Hofmann." Arts, Vol. 3 1 , No. 5, February, 1957, p. 57.

. "Hans Hofmann." Arts, Vol. 3 1 , No. 8, May, 1957, pp. 30-33 .

Raynor, Vivien. "In the G a l l e r i e s . " Arts Magazine, Vol. 36 , No. 5 , February, 1962, p. 38 .

. "In the G a l l e r i e s . " Arts Magazine, Vol. 3 8 , No. 1, October, 1963, p. 57-

"Reviews and Previews; Hans Hofmann." Art News, Vol. XLVI, No. 2 , A p r i l , 1947, p. 4 5 .

"Reviews and Previews; Hans Hofmann." Art News, Vol. XLVIII, No. 8 , December, 1949, p. 42 .

Rose, Barbara. "The Second Generation: Academy and Break­through." Art Forum, Vol. IV, No. 1, Sept., 1965, pp. 53-63.

Rosenberg, Harold. "The Art G a l l e r i e s . " The New Yorker, Vol. XXXIX, No. 37 , November 2 , 1963, p. 100.

. "Hans Hofmann." Vogue, Vol. 145, No. 9 , May, 1965, pp. 192-195.

Page 149: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

142 . "Hans Hofmann's L i f e Class." P o r t f o l i o and Art

News Annual, No. 6, Autumn, 1962, pp. 16-31. . "Hans Hofmann: Nature into Action." Art News,

Vol. 56, No. 3 , May, 1957, pp. 34-36. Sandler, Irving. "Controversial Abstractions." The Saturday

Review, Vol. 11, No. 32, August 10, 1957, pp. 14-15.

Sanders, Irving H. "Hans Hofmann [Kootz]." Art News, Vol. 58, No. 10, February, I960, p. 13.

. "Hans Hofmann [Kootz]." Art News, Vol. 60, No.2, A p r i l , 1961, p. 10.

Sawyer, Kenneth B. "Largely Hans Hofmann." The Baltimore Museum of Art News, Vol. XVIII, No. 3, February, 1955, pp. 9-12. . "Painters over Seventy-five." The Hudson Review,

V o l . X, No. 3, Autumn, 1957, pp. 440-446. . "Painting and Sculpture—the New York Season."

Craft Horizons, Vol. XXII, No. 3, May/June, 1962, p. 53.

Schwartz, Marilyn D. "Hans Hofmann at Kootz." Apollo, Vol. LXIX, No. 409, March, 1959, p. 93-

Scott, Charles H. "New Tides i n West Coast Art." Canadian Art, Vol. 7, No. 2, Winter, p. 58.

Shadbolt, J.L. "The Notebooks of Donald J a r v i s . " Canadian Art, Vol. 1, No. 1, Autumn, 1952, pp.8-10.

Seattle. World's F a i r . Art Since 1950: American and Inter­national. Seattle: Seattle World's F a i r , 1962.

Seckler, Dorothy. "Can Painting be Taught." Art News, Vol. 50, No. 1, March, 1951, p. 40.

S i l v e r , Cathy S. "5 Star Show t h i s Winter: Hofmann." Art News. Vol. 60, No. 10, February, 1962, p. 4 3 .

Solomon, Joseph. "Hofmann as Painter." Arts, Vol. 31, No. 9, June, 1957, p. 7.

"Some Excerpts from Reviews of Hans Hofmann's Recent Exhibitions at the M.O.M.A., Sept. 9 - Dec. 1, 1963," c i t e d i n Sammuel Kootz Gallery, New York. Hans Hofmann Catalogue, Feb. 18 - March 7, 1964, New York: Sammuel Kootz Gallery, 1964.

Page 150: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

143

Tanabe, Takao. Interviews w i t h the w r i t e r . March, 1966.

Thomas, L i o n e l . " A r c h i t e c t u r e and S c u l p t u r e . " Canadian A r t , V o l . 19 , No. 3 , May/June, 1962, p. 22.

. Interviews w i t h the w r i t e r . January and February, T966.

T i l l i m , Sidney. "Report on the Venice B i e n n a l e , " A r t s Magazine, V o l . 35 , No. 1, October, I 9 6 0 , pp7~ j2 -33 .

"To John F. Kennedy—Homage by A r t i s t s . " A r t i n America, No. 5 , 1964, p. 91 .

"Trapezoids and Empathy." Time, V o l . LVI I , No. 23 , December 3 , 1951, p. 72.

T y l e r , P o r t e r . "Hans Hofmann [Kootz: t o Dec. 1 1 ] . " A r t News, V o l . 53, No. 8 , December, 1954, p. 51.

. "Hans Hofmann [Kootz: t o Dec 3 ] . " Art News, V o l . 5*4, No. 8 , December, 1955, p. 56.

Vancouver. A r t G a l l e r y . P a i n t i n g s and Drawings, Don J a r v i s , Nov. 22-Dec. 11, 1949. Vancouver: Vancouver A r t G a l l e r y , 1949.

. Takao Tanabe: P a i n t i n g s and Drawings, 1954-57. Vancouver: Vancouver A r t G a l l e r y , 1957.

Werner, A l f r e d . "Review of F r e d e r i c k S. Wight's 'Hans Hofmann*." C o l l e g e A r t J o u r n a l , V o l . XVII, No. 2 , Winter, 1958, p. 223.

Wolf, Ben. "The Digest Interviews Hans Hofmann." The A r t D i g e s t , V o l . 19, No. 13, A p r i l 1, 1945, p. 52.

Page 151: THE THEORIES OF HANS HOFMANN AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON …€¦ · reader may becom aware oe f the events that led up t o his theoretical development. Through all available published

144

SOURCES OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Plate I, "Fantasia," Plate I I , "Effervescence," and Plate IV, "Le G i l o t i n , " from Loran, E r i e . Recent G i f t s and Loans of Paintings by Hans Hofmann. Berkeley, Regents of the University of C a l i f o r n i a , 1964., Plates I, I I , and III respectively.

Plate I I I , "Magenta and Blue," from Wight, Frederick S. Hans Hofmann. Berkeley , University of C a l i f o r n i a Press, 1957, 1957, p. 26.

Plate V, "Above Deep Waters," Plate VI, "Pre-Dawn," from Hofmann, Hans, and Hunter, Sam. Hans Hofmann. New York, Harry N. Abrams, Inc., I963, Plates 100 and 132 respectively.

Plate V I I ? "Landscape of an I n t e r i o r Place," and Plate VIII, "Winter Evening," from the Slid e Library, the Depart­ment of Fine Arts, University of B r i t i s h Columbia.